1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
166 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
177 by the \SpecialChar LyX
182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
184 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
185 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
186 Documentation mailing list:
187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
189 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
211 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
215 \begin_inset Note Note
218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
219 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
220 \begin_inset Newline newline
225 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
233 \begin_layout Standard
234 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
235 LatexCommand tableofcontents
242 \begin_layout Chapter
246 \begin_layout Section
247 What is \SpecialChar LyX
251 \begin_layout Standard
253 is a document preparation system.
254 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
255 scripts, publishable books, business
256 letters and proposals,
257 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
261 It is unlike most other
262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
271 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
287 pt type, left justified, 5
288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
297 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
301 \begin_layout Standard
302 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
307 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
311 \begin_layout Standard
316 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
317 's philosophy: most importantly,
318 the format of all of the manuals.
319 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
320 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
321 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
324 \begin_layout Section
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
331 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
333 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
334 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
338 \begin_layout Standard
339 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
340 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
341 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
343 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
344 only a vertical scrollbar.
347 \begin_layout Standard
348 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
349 The first case is large images.
350 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
351 the image and use the option
362 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
365 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
368 \begin_layout Standard
369 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
370 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
378 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
385 \begin_layout Section
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
392 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
394 Just select the manual you want to read from the
401 \begin_layout Section
402 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
406 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
413 \begin_layout Standard
414 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
415 can be configured via the menu
417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
421 \begin_inset Index idx
424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
431 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
434 packages are available.
435 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
437 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
438 was installed on your system,
439 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
444 \begin_inset space \space{}
447 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
448 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
450 To force \SpecialChar LyX
451 to re-inspect your system use
453 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
457 \begin_inset Index idx
460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
461 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
467 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
468 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
471 \begin_layout Section
474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
476 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
483 \begin_layout Standard
484 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
485 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 installed but you will not be
488 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
489 or print your documents
493 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
494 Some \SpecialChar LyX
495 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
504 which can produce PDFs and the like.
507 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
512 every \SpecialChar LyX
513 document can still be output as plain text
514 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
520 \begin_layout Standard
521 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
527 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
528 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
531 \begin_layout Standard
532 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
533 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
534 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
537 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
545 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
546 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
549 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
553 \begin_inset Index idx
556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
557 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
565 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
572 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
576 \begin_layout Chapter
577 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
581 \begin_layout Section
582 Basic File Operations
583 \begin_inset Index idx
586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
595 \begin_layout Standard
600 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
601 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
604 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
642 arg "buffer-new-template"
648 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \begin_layout Itemize
678 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
682 \begin_layout Itemize
684 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
696 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
722 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \begin_layout Itemize
756 arg "buffer-write-as"
760 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
764 \begin_layout Itemize
766 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
782 \begin_layout Itemize
796 \begin_layout Itemize
810 \begin_layout Standard
811 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
812 few minor differences.
815 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
826 command lists the available templates.
827 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
828 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
829 and possibly propose text fragments
831 for the document, features
832 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
835 you would otherwise need to
836 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
838 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
842 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
846 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
854 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
860 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
861 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
865 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
873 \begin_layout Standard
874 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
906 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
907 to open a file or create a new one, that big
908 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
912 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
916 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
927 \begin_layout Standard
949 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
951 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
954 people work on the same document at the same time.
958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
962 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
967 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
968 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
972 \begin_inset Flex Emph
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
977 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
978 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
987 \begin_inset Flex Emph
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1000 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1011 \begin_inset space ~
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1020 will reload the document from disk.
1021 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1022 and want to restore it to the last save
1023 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1035 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1036 them as your changes.
1039 \begin_layout Section
1040 Basic Editing Features
1041 \begin_inset Index idx
1044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1053 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1060 \begin_layout Standard
1061 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1062 can perform cut and paste operations
1063 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1064 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1065 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1066 editing features and how to access
1068 We will start with cut and paste.
1071 \begin_layout Standard
1072 As you might expect, the
1076 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1077 various other editing features.
1078 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1082 \begin_layout Itemize
1088 \begin_inset Index idx
1091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1120 \begin_layout Itemize
1126 \begin_inset Index idx
1129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1158 \begin_layout Itemize
1164 \begin_inset Index idx
1167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1192 \begin_layout Itemize
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1202 \begin_layout Itemize
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1212 \begin_layout Itemize
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset Index idx
1229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1238 \begin_inset Index idx
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1256 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1266 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1272 \begin_layout Standard
1273 The first three are self-explanatory.
1274 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1275 and other programs using
1296 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1297 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1302 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1303 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1304 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1305 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1306 into individual cells.
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1315 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1316 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1320 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1331 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1346 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1347 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1348 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1354 \begin_inset space \space{}
1357 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1358 text which is often meaningless.)
1361 \begin_layout Standard
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1368 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1387 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1388 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1389 is inserted as one paragraph.
1390 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1394 \begin_inset space ~
1399 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1400 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1406 \begin_inset space ~
1409 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1423 \begin_inset space ~
1426 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1429 paste from the primary selection.
1430 This is normally the currently selected text.
1433 \begin_layout Standard
1436 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1438 \begin_inset space ~
1442 \begin_inset space ~
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1454 \begin_inset space ~
1460 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1466 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1478 \begin_inset space ~
1483 button to skip the curren
1484 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1488 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1495 \begin_inset space ~
1500 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1504 \begin_inset space ~
1509 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1511 If the toggle is set, searching for
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1523 will not match the word
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 Match whole words only
1540 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1541 to only find complete words, e.
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1575 also offers an advanced
1578 \begin_inset space ~
1582 \begin_inset space ~
1587 feature that is described in section
1588 \begin_inset space ~
1592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1594 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1601 \begin_layout Standard
1602 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1603 \begin_inset space \space{}
1607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1615 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1617 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1622 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1629 \begin_layout Standard
1633 arg "inset-select-all"
1636 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1637 When the cursor is inside an inset
1640 arg "inset-select-all"
1643 selects the content of the inset.
1647 arg "inset-select-all"
1650 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1651 then to the whole document.
1655 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1658 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1662 \begin_layout Section
1664 \begin_inset Index idx
1667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1674 \begin_inset Index idx
1677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1686 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1693 \begin_layout Standard
1694 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1696 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1702 or the toolbar button
1709 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 or the toolbar button
1721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1728 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1732 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1737 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1738 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1747 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1748 This is a consequence of the 100
1749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1752 step undo limit mentioned above.
1755 \begin_layout Standard
1764 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1766 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1770 \begin_layout Section
1772 \begin_inset Index idx
1775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1784 \begin_layout Standard
1785 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1788 \begin_layout Enumerate
1793 \begin_layout Itemize
1798 once anywhere in the edit window.
1799 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1803 \begin_layout Enumerate
1808 \begin_layout Itemize
1815 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1821 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1822 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1825 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1831 \begin_layout Itemize
1832 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1842 \begin_layout Enumerate
1843 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1847 \begin_layout Standard
1848 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1849 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1853 \begin_layout Section
1855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1857 name "sec:Navigating"
1862 \begin_inset Index idx
1865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1876 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1879 \begin_layout Itemize
1884 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1885 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1888 \begin_layout Itemize
1889 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1891 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 or by the toolbar button
1901 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1907 \begin_layout Itemize
1908 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1910 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1913 and use the same menu to return to them.
1914 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1917 \begin_layout Standard
1921 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1926 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1927 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1934 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1935 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1936 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1937 last editing position.
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1945 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1949 \begin_layout Subsection
1951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1953 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 Navigating ! Outline
1968 \begin_inset Index idx
1971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1982 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1983 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1984 \begin_inset space ~
1988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1990 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1994 ), notes, or citations (see section
1995 \begin_inset space ~
1999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2001 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2006 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2012 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2013 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2014 dialog and to modify the citation.
2017 \begin_layout Standard
2022 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2023 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2025 Labels and References
2027 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2036 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2039 \begin_layout Standard
2040 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2041 control the display.
2046 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2047 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2052 option keeps it in the current view state.
2053 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2057 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2058 \begin_inset space ~
2061 3, the subsections of sections
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2065 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2070 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2075 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2085 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2088 \begin_layout Standard
2095 button refreshes the TOC (
2096 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2098 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2102 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2104 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2108 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2112 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2116 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2120 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2122 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2126 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2128 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2132 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2134 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2138 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2142 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2144 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2148 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2152 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2156 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2160 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2164 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2168 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2172 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2176 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2178 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2182 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2196 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2197 For example, you can move section
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2205 2.4 or after section
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2211 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2224 (or the corresponding key bindings
2232 ) you can change the level of sections.
2233 You can make section
2234 \begin_inset space ~
2238 \begin_inset space ~
2242 \begin_inset space ~
2248 \begin_layout Standard
2249 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2250 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2253 \begin_layout Subsection
2254 Horizontal Scrolling
2255 \begin_inset Index idx
2258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2259 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2267 \begin_layout Standard
2269 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2271 \begin_inset space ~
2274 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2275 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2276 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2280 \begin_layout Standard
2281 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2285 \begin_layout Itemize
2287 is used on a small tablet computer
2290 \begin_layout Itemize
2291 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2303 \begin_inset space ~
2316 \begin_layout Itemize
2317 Math constructs with long command names
2320 \begin_layout Standard
2321 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2322 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2324 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2325 window so that table
2326 \begin_inset space ~
2330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2332 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2337 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2339 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2340 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2343 \begin_layout Standard
2344 \begin_inset Float table
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2357 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2361 Horizontal scrolling test.
2369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2371 \begin_inset Tabular
2372 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2373 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2376 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 \begin_layout Section
2419 Input/Word Completion
2420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2422 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2427 \begin_inset Index idx
2430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2437 \begin_inset Index idx
2440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2471 \begin_layout Standard
2473 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2475 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2476 is used to propose completions.
2479 \begin_layout Standard
2480 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2488 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2495 \begin_inset space ~
2499 \begin_inset space ~
2504 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2508 \begin_inset space ~
2513 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2514 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2518 \begin_inset space ~
2524 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2525 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2526 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2527 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2530 \begin_layout Standard
2532 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2533 completions available.
2538 key to accept a proposed completion.
2539 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2540 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2541 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2544 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2551 \begin_layout Standard
2552 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2553 ing options for text.
2555 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2557 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2559 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2562 he special math option
2566 enables characters to be composed.
2568 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2570 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2574 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2577 you want to insert the character
2578 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2582 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2585 input the characters
2586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2598 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2600 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2604 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2606 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2611 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2613 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2616 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2619 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2621 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2624 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2629 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2631 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2635 's installation folder.
2637 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2638 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2645 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2650 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2651 In the example above,
2656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_layout Section
2690 \begin_inset Index idx
2693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2700 \begin_inset Index idx
2703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2732 \begin_inset Index idx
2735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2766 \begin_layout Standard
2767 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2781 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2784 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2788 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2789 \begin_inset space ~
2793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2795 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2802 \begin_layout Standard
2806 \begin_inset space ~
2814 \begin_inset space ~
2835 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2839 \begin_layout Labeling
2840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2844 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2845 LatexCommand nomenclature
2847 description "Tabulator key"
2854 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2856 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2857 \begin_inset space ~
2861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2863 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2870 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2874 , especially section
2875 \begin_inset space ~
2879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2881 reference "subsec:Lists"
2887 If you are still confused, look in the
2892 \begin_inset Newline newline
2900 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2901 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2905 \begin_layout Labeling
2906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2910 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2911 LatexCommand nomenclature
2913 description "Escape key"
2921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2928 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2929 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2932 \begin_layout Labeling
2933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2938 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2939 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 There are three modifier keys:
2947 \begin_layout Labeling
2948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2966 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2967 LatexCommand nomenclature
2969 description "Control key"
2974 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2975 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2979 \begin_layout Itemize
2988 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2991 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3003 \begin_layout Itemize
3012 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3016 \begin_layout Labeling
3017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3035 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3036 LatexCommand nomenclature
3038 description "Shift key"
3043 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3044 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3047 \begin_layout Labeling
3048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3067 LatexCommand nomenclature
3069 description "Alt or Meta key"
3074 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3075 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3076 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3082 \begin_inset Newline newline
3085 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3087 menu accelerator keys
3090 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3091 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3095 \begin_layout Standard
3096 For example, the sequence
3097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3103 \begin_inset space ~
3107 \begin_inset space ~
3113 \begin_inset space ~
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3140 \begin_inset space ~
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3161 manual lists all other things bound to the
3169 \begin_layout Standard
3170 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3172 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3174 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3175 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3177 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3178 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3179 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3181 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3197 followed by a capital
3204 \begin_layout Chapter
3207 \begin_inset Index idx
3210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3220 \begin_layout Section
3222 \begin_inset Index idx
3225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3234 \begin_layout Subsection
3238 \begin_layout Standard
3239 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3240 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3241 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3242 numbering schemes, and so on.
3243 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3244 and format the title of your document differently.
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3252 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3253 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3254 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3255 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3256 picks one for you by default.
3257 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3260 \begin_layout Subsection
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3274 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3281 \begin_layout Standard
3282 You can select a class using the
3284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3285 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3289 \begin_inset Index idx
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3307 \begin_layout Standard
3308 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3313 \begin_layout Description
3314 Article for basic articles
3317 \begin_layout Description
3318 Report for basic reports
3321 \begin_layout Description
3322 Book for writing a book
3325 \begin_layout Description
3326 Letter for US-style letters
3329 \begin_layout Standard
3330 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3331 only uses if you have installed
3332 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3334 distributions will include
3336 Here are some of the classes.
3337 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3339 Special Document Classes
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3352 \begin_layout Description
3353 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3357 \begin_layout Description
3358 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3362 \begin_layout Description
3363 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3364 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3365 There are three article layouts available.
3366 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3367 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3368 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3369 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 sequential numbering
3375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3378 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3379 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3380 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3381 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3384 \begin_layout Description
3385 Beamer Layout for presentations
3388 \begin_layout Description
3389 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3390 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3391 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3392 with \SpecialChar LyX
3396 \begin_layout Description
3397 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3400 \begin_layout Description
3402 \begin_inset space ~
3405 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3408 \begin_layout Description
3409 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3412 \begin_layout Description
3413 Foils Used to make transparencies
3416 \begin_layout Description
3417 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3418 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3419 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3420 with \SpecialChar LyX
3424 \begin_layout Description
3425 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3426 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3429 \begin_layout Description
3430 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3433 \begin_layout Description
3434 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3437 \begin_layout Description
3438 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3439 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3440 (Is used by this document.)
3443 \begin_layout Description
3444 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3447 \begin_layout Description
3448 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3451 \begin_layout Description
3456 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3457 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3459 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3463 \begin_layout Description
3464 Slides Used to make transparencies
3467 \begin_layout Description
3469 \begin_inset space ~
3472 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3473 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3476 \begin_layout Description
3477 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3480 \begin_layout Standard
3481 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3483 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3485 Special Document Classes
3492 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3493 of the document classes.
3496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3500 \begin_layout Standard
3501 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3506 \begin_inset Index idx
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3526 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3527 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3529 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3532 \begin_layout Standard
3535 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3540 , are highly specialized.
3542 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3543 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3544 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3545 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3546 by some document class.
3547 There are just too many of them.
3548 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3551 \begin_layout Standard
3552 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3560 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3561 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3562 document class for a new file.
3564 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3567 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3574 manual for information on how to install them.
3575 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3581 \begin_layout Standard
3582 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3583 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3584 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3585 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3586 class files to be used for dissertation
3587 s submitted to those universities.
3588 The \SpecialChar LyX
3589 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3591 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3595 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3601 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3608 name "subsec:Modules"
3613 \begin_inset Index idx
3616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 \begin_layout Standard
3626 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3627 chosen document class.
3628 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3629 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3640 \begin_inset Index idx
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3650 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3654 \begin_layout Standard
3655 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3656 packages or file format converters that are not always
3657 installed by default.
3659 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3660 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3661 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3662 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3664 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3665 file without the missing prerequisites.
3666 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3667 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3670 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3674 \begin_inset Index idx
3677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3685 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3689 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3693 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3702 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3704 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3715 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3718 \begin_layout Standard
3719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3727 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3729 will advise you about these things.
3737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3741 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3746 \begin_inset Index idx
3749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 Document ! Local Layout
3758 \begin_layout Standard
3759 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3760 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3761 : They are intended to be used in
3762 a variety of different documents.
3763 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3764 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3765 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3766 need a specific inset or
3767 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3769 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3772 style only that one time.
3773 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3775 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3793 manual for information on how to use it.
3796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3800 \begin_layout Standard
3801 Each class has a default set of options.
3802 Here's a quick table describing them:
3805 \begin_layout Standard
3806 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3812 \begin_layout Standard
3814 \begin_inset Tabular
3815 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3816 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3821 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 You're probably also wondering what
4284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4288 \begin_inset space ~
4292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4296 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4297 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4302 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4307 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4317 headings, there are also
4325 headings, and so on.
4326 We will describe these headings fully in section
4327 \begin_inset space ~
4331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4333 reference "subsec:Headings"
4340 \begin_layout Subsection
4342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4344 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4349 \begin_inset Index idx
4352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 \begin_inset Index idx
4362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4371 \begin_layout Standard
4372 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4381 \begin_inset space ~
4389 \begin_inset space ~
4394 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4396 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4397 doesn't support special options you want to
4398 use for your document.
4399 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4400 -class and its options, you have to read
4404 \begin_layout Standard
4406 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4410 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4414 \begin_inset space ~
4421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 \begin_inset space ~
4432 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4433 You can choose between the following five options:
4436 \begin_layout Labeling
4437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4442 Use default page style of current class.
4445 \begin_layout Labeling
4446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4451 No page numbers or headings.
4454 \begin_layout Labeling
4455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4463 \begin_layout Labeling
4464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4469 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4470 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4471 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4472 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4475 \begin_layout Labeling
4476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4481 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4482 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4488 \begin_inset Index idx
4491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4499 How they are defined is explained in section
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4506 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4515 \begin_inset space ~
4519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4521 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4528 \begin_layout Subsection
4529 Paper Size and Orientation
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4534 Document ! Paper size
4540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4542 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4549 \begin_layout Standard
4550 You can find the following options in the menu
4553 \begin_inset space ~
4560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4564 \begin_inset Index idx
4567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4576 \begin_layout Labeling
4577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 What size paper to print on.
4591 \begin_layout Itemize
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 \begin_layout Itemize
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4618 US letter, US legal, US executive
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4634 \begin_layout Labeling
4635 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4640 To choose whether to output as
4651 \begin_layout Labeling
4652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4656 \begin_inset space ~
4661 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4662 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4665 \begin_layout Subsection
4667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4669 name "subsec:Margins"
4674 \begin_inset Index idx
4677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4684 \begin_inset Index idx
4687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4696 \begin_layout Standard
4697 Paper margins are set in the menu
4699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4703 \begin_inset Index idx
4706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4715 \begin_layout Standard
4716 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4717 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4718 the paper format and the font size into account.
4721 \begin_layout Subsection
4725 \begin_layout Standard
4726 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4727 has to convert everything into the new
4729 That includes the paragraph environments.
4730 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4731 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4732 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4734 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4743 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4745 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4746 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4747 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4750 \begin_layout Section
4751 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4752 \begin_inset Index idx
4755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4756 Paragraph ! Indentation
4764 \begin_layout Subsection
4766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4768 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4776 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4777 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4780 \begin_layout Standard
4781 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4782 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4783 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4784 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4788 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4794 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4795 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4796 language than English.
4798 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4802 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4803 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4804 into \SpecialChar LyX
4806 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4809 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4811 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4812 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4813 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4820 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4821 goes to produce a printable file.
4826 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4828 gives you the ability globally to change
4832 these pre-coded spacings.
4833 We will explain more later.
4836 \begin_layout Subsection
4837 Paragraph Separation
4838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4840 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4845 \begin_inset Index idx
4848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4849 Paragraph ! Separation
4857 \begin_layout Standard
4865 \begin_inset space ~
4873 \begin_inset space ~
4880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4884 \begin_inset Index idx
4887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4893 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4896 \begin_layout Subsection
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4901 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4904 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4906 \begin_inset space ~
4911 dialog and toggle the
4914 \begin_inset space ~
4919 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4922 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4926 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4927 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4931 \begin_layout Standard
4932 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4933 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4936 \begin_layout Subsection
4938 \begin_inset Index idx
4941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4957 \begin_inset Index idx
4960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4969 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4973 \begin_inset space ~
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4999 installed to use this feature.
5004 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5008 \begin_inset space ~
5013 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5014 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5017 \begin_layout Section
5018 Paragraph Environments
5019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5021 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5026 \begin_inset Index idx
5029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5030 Paragraph ! Environments
5036 \begin_inset Index idx
5039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5040 Paragraph environments|(
5048 \begin_layout Subsection
5052 \begin_layout Standard
5053 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5056 \begin_layout Standard
5065 } \SpecialChar ldots
5075 \begin_inset Newline newline
5078 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5080 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5081 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5082 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5091 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5094 \begin_layout Standard
5095 A paragraph environment is simply a
5096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5103 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5104 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5105 scheme, labels, and so on.
5106 Additionally, you can
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5114 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5115 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5116 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5117 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5119 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5121 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5126 \begin_inset Graphics
5127 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5133 at the left end of the toolbar.
5135 will change the environment of the
5139 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5140 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5141 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5144 \begin_layout Standard
5153 create a new paragraph using the
5157 paragraph environment.
5159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5166 because if you are in one of these environments:
5169 \begin_layout Itemize
5175 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 \begin_layout Itemize
5187 \begin_layout Itemize
5193 \begin_layout Itemize
5199 \begin_layout Itemize
5205 \begin_layout Itemize
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5217 , rather than resetting it to
5222 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5223 \begin_inset space ~
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5229 reference "sec:Nesting"
5236 \begin_layout Subsection
5240 \begin_layout Standard
5241 The default paragraph environment is
5246 It creates a plain paragraph.
5248 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5249 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5250 this manual) are in the
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5258 You can nest a paragraph using the
5262 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5270 \begin_layout Subsection
5272 \begin_inset Index idx
5275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5285 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5286 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5295 for thanks or contact information.
5296 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5297 places all of this on a separate page
5298 along with today's date.
5299 For other types of documents, the title
5300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5307 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5310 \begin_layout Standard
5312 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5326 Here's how you use them:
5329 \begin_layout Itemize
5330 Put the title of your document in the
5337 \begin_layout Itemize
5338 Put the author name in the
5345 \begin_layout Itemize
5346 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5347 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5353 Note that using this environment is optional.
5354 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5355 will automatically insert today's date.
5356 If you don't want a date, use the option
5358 Suppress default date on front page
5362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5365 \begin_inset space ~
5373 \begin_layout Standard
5374 You can use footnotes to insert
5375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5382 or contact information.
5385 \begin_layout Subsection
5387 \begin_inset Index idx
5390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5399 name "subsec:Headings"
5406 \begin_layout Standard
5407 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5409 takes care of the numbering for you.
5412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5414 \begin_inset Index idx
5417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5418 Section headings ! Numbered
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5427 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5431 \begin_layout Enumerate
5437 \begin_layout Enumerate
5443 \begin_layout Enumerate
5449 \begin_layout Enumerate
5455 \begin_layout Enumerate
5461 \begin_layout Enumerate
5467 \begin_layout Enumerate
5473 \begin_layout Standard
5475 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5476 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5477 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5478 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5480 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5482 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5488 \begin_layout Standard
5489 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5490 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5491 You group the book into chapters.
5493 does a similar grouping:
5496 \begin_layout Itemize
5501 is divided into either
5512 \begin_layout Itemize
5524 \begin_layout Itemize
5536 \begin_layout Itemize
5548 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 \begin_layout Itemize
5572 \begin_layout Standard
5573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5581 Not all document types use the
5585 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5590 is the top-level heading.
5598 \begin_layout Standard
5603 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5604 labels it with its number,
5605 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5607 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5621 \begin_inset Index idx
5624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5634 The unnumbered section headings have a
5635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5642 at the end of their name.
5643 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5644 the table of contents, see section
5645 \begin_inset space ~
5649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5658 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5659 Changing the Numbering
5660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5662 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5669 \begin_layout Standard
5670 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5671 in the Table of Contents.
5672 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5674 Just as certain classes start with
5688 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5698 This is something you can change.
5701 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5708 \begin_inset Index idx
5711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5720 \begin_inset space ~
5724 \begin_inset space ~
5729 you will see two counters.
5734 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5735 numbers a section heading.
5736 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5741 Short Titles of Headings
5742 \begin_inset Index idx
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5746 Section headings ! Short titles
5752 \begin_inset Argument 1
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5764 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5771 \begin_layout Standard
5772 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5773 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5774 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5775 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5778 \begin_layout Standard
5780 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5781 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5782 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5783 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5788 \begin_inset space ~
5794 This will insert a box labeled
5795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5799 \begin_inset space ~
5803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5806 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5807 This also works for captions inside floats.
5808 There can only be one short title per title.
5811 \begin_layout Standard
5812 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5819 \begin_layout Standard
5820 The following information applies to all section headings:
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5827 \begin_layout Itemize
5828 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5839 \begin_layout Subsection
5843 \begin_layout Standard
5845 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5859 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5860 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5861 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5862 the text they contain.
5863 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5871 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5874 \begin_layout Standard
5875 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5884 when you start a new paragraph.
5885 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5889 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5890 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5891 have to change back to the
5895 environment yourself.
5898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5907 \begin_inset Index idx
5910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5920 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5921 time for the differences.
5930 are identical except for one difference:
5934 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5943 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5946 \begin_layout Standard
5947 Here's an example of the
5960 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5962 See – no indentation!
5966 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5967 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5968 the other paragraph.
5971 \begin_layout Standard
5972 Here's another example, this time in the
5979 \begin_layout Quotation
5985 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5986 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5987 the first line, then
5991 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5995 you were quoting other text.
5998 \begin_layout Quotation
5999 Here's a new paragraph.
6000 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6001 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6004 \begin_layout Standard
6005 As the examples show,
6009 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6010 They should put quotes in the
6015 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6019 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6024 \begin_inset Index idx
6027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6034 \begin_inset Index idx
6037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6053 \begin_layout Standard
6058 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6064 \begin_inset Newline newline
6067 Which I did not rehearse!
6071 It could be much worse.
6072 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6074 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6075 indented a bit more than the first.
6076 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6082 \begin_inset Newline newline
6085 And make things look fine
6086 \begin_inset Newline newline
6092 arg "newline-insert newline"
6098 \begin_layout Standard
6103 does not indent both margins.
6104 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6105 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6108 arg "newline-insert newline"
6114 \begin_layout Subsection
6116 \begin_inset Index idx
6119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6135 \begin_layout Standard
6137 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6147 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6148 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6157 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6158 lets you provide your own label.
6159 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6160 describing some general features of all four of them.
6163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6170 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6171 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6180 reset the environment to
6184 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6185 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6186 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6190 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6194 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6202 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6203 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6204 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6206 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6207 you read all of section
6208 \begin_inset space ~
6212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6214 reference "sec:Nesting"
6221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6223 \begin_inset Index idx
6226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6242 \begin_layout Standard
6243 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6247 paragraph environment.
6248 It has the following properties:
6251 \begin_layout Itemize
6252 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6256 \begin_layout Itemize
6258 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6261 \begin_layout Itemize
6262 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6266 \begin_layout Itemize
6267 The items can have any length.
6269 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6270 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6277 \begin_layout Itemize
6282 environment inside another
6286 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6290 \begin_layout Itemize
6291 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6294 \begin_layout Itemize
6296 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6299 \begin_layout Itemize
6301 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6307 reference "sec:Nesting"
6311 for a full explanation of nesting.
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6325 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6328 \begin_layout Standard
6329 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6330 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6333 \begin_layout Itemize
6334 The label for the first level
6338 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6342 \begin_layout Itemize
6343 The label for the second level is a dash.
6347 \begin_layout Itemize
6348 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6352 \begin_layout Itemize
6353 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6357 \begin_layout Itemize
6358 Back out to the third level.
6362 \begin_layout Itemize
6363 Back to the second level.
6367 \begin_layout Itemize
6368 Back to the outermost level.
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6372 These are the default labels for an
6377 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6382 dialog in the submenu
6387 \begin_inset Index idx
6390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6396 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6400 \begin_layout Standard
6401 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6402 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6404 \begin_inset space ~
6408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6410 reference "sec:Nesting"
6417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6419 \begin_inset Index idx
6422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6431 name "sec:Enumerate"
6438 \begin_layout Standard
6443 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6444 It has these properties:
6447 \begin_layout Enumerate
6448 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6452 \begin_layout Enumerate
6453 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6457 \begin_layout Enumerate
6459 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6462 \begin_layout Enumerate
6467 environment resets the counter to one.
6470 \begin_layout Enumerate
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6485 Items can have any length.
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6489 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6492 \begin_layout Enumerate
6493 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6496 \begin_layout Enumerate
6497 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6501 \begin_layout Standard
6510 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6512 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6513 labels the four different levels in an
6520 \begin_layout Enumerate
6521 The first level of an
6525 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6529 \begin_layout Enumerate
6530 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6534 \begin_layout Enumerate
6535 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6539 \begin_layout Enumerate
6540 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6543 \begin_layout Enumerate
6544 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6549 \begin_layout Enumerate
6550 Back to the third level
6554 \begin_layout Enumerate
6555 Back to the second level.
6559 \begin_layout Enumerate
6560 Back to the outermost level.
6563 \begin_layout Standard
6564 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6568 environment, see section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6580 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6584 \begin_layout Standard
6585 There is more to nesting
6589 environments than we've stated here.
6590 You should read section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "sec:Nesting"
6601 to learn more about nesting.
6604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6606 \begin_inset Index idx
6609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6619 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6623 list has no fixed label.
6624 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6633 of the first line as the label.
6637 \begin_layout Description
6638 Example: This is an example of the
6645 \begin_layout Standard
6647 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6651 \begin_layout Standard
6653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6660 it is meant that the first usage of the
6664 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6666 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6674 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6682 \begin_inset space ~
6688 \begin_inset space ~
6692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6694 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6698 for more information.) Here is an example:
6701 \begin_layout Description
6703 \begin_inset space ~
6706 Example: This one shows how to use a
6709 \begin_inset space ~
6721 \begin_layout Description
6722 Usage: You should use the
6726 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6727 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6729 It's not a good idea to use a
6733 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6734 You're better off using
6746 paragraphs into them.
6749 \begin_layout Description
6750 Nesting: You can nest
6754 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6758 \begin_layout Standard
6759 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6760 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6761 them from the first line.
6764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6766 \begin_inset Index idx
6769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 \begin_layout Standard
6783 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6784 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6788 \begin_layout Standard
6797 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6799 Here are its properties:
6802 \begin_layout Labeling
6803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6805 \begin_inset space ~
6808 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6817 of each line as the item label.
6822 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6823 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6824 space as described above.
6827 \begin_layout Labeling
6828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6829 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6830 uses different margins for the item label and the
6831 body of the item text.
6832 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6833 label width plus a little extra space.
6836 \begin_layout Labeling
6837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6839 \begin_inset space ~
6842 width \SpecialChar LyX
6843 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6844 If the label width is larger, the label
6845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6852 into the first line.
6853 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6854 margin of the rest of the item text.
6857 \begin_layout Labeling
6858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6860 \begin_inset space ~
6863 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6868 environment has the same left margin.
6869 \begin_inset Newline newline
6872 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6877 \begin_inset space ~
6882 dialog (toolbar button
6885 arg "layout-paragraph"
6892 \begin_inset space ~
6897 determines the default label width.
6898 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6907 multiple times instead.
6908 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6918 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6926 every time you alter a label in a
6931 \begin_inset Newline newline
6934 The predefined default width is the length of
6935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6943 \begin_inset space ~
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6954 list the same way as the
6958 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6964 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6973 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6974 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6976 \begin_inset space ~
6980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6982 reference "sec:Nesting"
6986 to learn about nesting.
6989 \begin_layout Standard
6990 There is yet another feature of the
6994 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6995 left-justifies the item labels by
6997 You can use additional
7001 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7002 justifies the item label.
7007 are documented in section
7008 \begin_inset space ~
7012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7014 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7019 Here are some examples:
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 Left The default for
7031 \begin_layout Labeling
7032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7033 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7040 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7043 \begin_layout Labeling
7044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7045 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7049 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7056 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7059 \begin_layout Subsection
7061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7063 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7068 \begin_inset Index idx
7071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 The features described in this section require that the module
7083 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7085 is loaded in the document settings.
7086 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7092 \begin_inset Index idx
7095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7106 Custom Enumerate Lists
7107 \begin_inset Index idx
7110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7111 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7121 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7127 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7128 There you add the command
7131 \begin_layout Standard
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7152 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7153 Code, look at section
7154 \begin_inset space ~
7158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7160 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7173 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7180 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7181 For capital Roman numerals replace
7193 in the command above.
7194 For Arabic numerals use
7202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7209 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7224 \begin_layout Standard
7226 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 You can only number 26
7235 \begin_inset space ~
7238 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7246 \begin_layout Standard
7247 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7248 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7251 \begin_layout Standard
7252 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7255 \begin_layout Enumerate
7256 \begin_inset Argument 1
7259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7285 \begin_layout Enumerate
7286 \begin_inset Argument 1
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7312 \begin_layout Enumerate
7317 \begin_layout Enumerate
7318 \begin_inset Argument 1
7321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7345 \begin_layout Enumerate
7346 \begin_inset Argument 1
7349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7376 For this list these commands were used:
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7390 \begin_inset Newline newline
7398 \begin_inset Newline newline
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7423 makes the label emphasized and
7432 \begin_layout Standard
7433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7442 lists until you change the definition.
7450 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7452 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7456 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7465 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7468 \begin_layout Enumerate
7469 \begin_inset Argument 1
7472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7491 \begin_inset Note Note
7494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7495 goes back to default numbering
7503 \begin_layout Enumerate
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7511 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7516 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7521 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7522 to indicate that it is a resumed
7523 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7524 , but in the output.
7527 \begin_layout Standard
7528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7536 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7546 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7548 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7549 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7550 of a normal enumeration.
7551 There, insert the command
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_layout Standard
7565 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7569 \begin_layout Enumerate
7573 \begin_layout Enumerate
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7578 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7581 \begin_layout Enumerate
7582 \begin_inset Argument 1
7585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 This enumeration starts at 4
7604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7606 \begin_inset Index idx
7609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7621 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7624 \begin_layout Itemize
7628 \begin_layout Itemize
7629 with standard spacing
7632 \begin_layout Standard
7633 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7635 Add there the command
7639 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7642 \begin_layout Itemize
7643 \begin_inset Argument 1
7646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7665 \begin_layout Itemize
7669 \begin_layout Itemize
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7681 \begin_inset Index idx
7684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7692 For more information see its documentation,
7693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7703 \begin_layout Standard
7704 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7706 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7707 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7711 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7714 \begin_layout Enumerate
7715 \begin_inset Argument 1
7718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7726 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7739 \begin_layout Enumerate
7740 with negative indentation
7743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7744 Further Customization
7745 \begin_inset Index idx
7748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7749 Lists ! Customization
7757 \begin_layout Standard
7758 You can also change the style of description lists.
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 changes the description label font, the command
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7779 sets the list style.
7782 \begin_layout Standard
7783 An example where the command
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7791 itshape, style=nextline
7794 \begin_layout Standard
7798 \begin_layout Description
7800 \begin_inset space ~
7804 \begin_inset Argument 1
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7813 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7815 itshape, style=nextline
7825 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7826 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7830 \begin_layout Description
7832 \begin_inset space ~
7835 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7836 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7837 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7847 \begin_inset Index idx
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7858 For more information see its documentation
7859 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7869 \begin_layout Subsection
7871 \begin_inset Index idx
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7885 \begin_inset space ~
7888 Address: An Overview
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7893 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7901 \begin_inset space ~
7907 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7908 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7909 gags on the document.
7910 In contrast, you can use the
7917 \begin_inset space ~
7922 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7923 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7928 Of course, you're not limited to using
7935 \begin_inset space ~
7944 \begin_inset space ~
7949 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7950 some European academic papers.
7953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7957 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7964 \begin_layout Standard
7969 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7970 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7974 \begin_inset space ~
7979 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7980 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7981 Here's an example of each:
7984 \begin_layout Right Address
7986 \begin_inset Newline newline
7990 \begin_inset Newline newline
7994 \begin_inset Newline newline
7997 When is it? What is today?
8000 \begin_layout Standard
8004 \begin_inset space ~
8010 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8012 the largest block of text on a single line.
8013 Here's an example of the
8020 \begin_layout Address
8022 \begin_inset Newline newline
8025 Where do I send this
8026 \begin_inset Newline newline
8029 Your post office and country
8032 \begin_layout Standard
8033 As you can see, both
8040 \begin_inset space ~
8045 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8050 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8051 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8057 This makes sense, since
8065 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8066 Thus, you have to use
8073 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8085 \begin_inset space ~
8090 ) to start a new line in an
8097 \begin_inset space ~
8105 \begin_layout Subsection
8109 \begin_layout Standard
8110 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8111 or list of references.
8113 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8118 \begin_inset Index idx
8121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8130 \begin_layout Standard
8135 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8136 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8137 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8138 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8142 in anything else or vice versa.
8148 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8149 The book document classes ignores the
8153 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8157 in a letter document class.
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8165 environment does several things for you.
8166 First, it puts the centered label
8167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8175 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8177 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8178 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8179 the subsequent text.
8180 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8182 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8187 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8191 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8192 The new paragraph will still be in the
8197 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8198 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8201 \begin_layout Standard
8202 \begin_inset Float figure
8209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 \begin_inset Graphics
8212 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8225 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8246 \begin_layout Standard
8247 We would love to demonstrate the
8251 environment, but since this document is in the
8252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 class, we can't do this.
8260 We inserted it therefore as figure
8261 \begin_inset space ~
8265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8267 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8272 If you have never heard of an
8273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8280 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8285 \begin_inset Index idx
8288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8297 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8309 environment is used to list references.
8310 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8311 only use it at the end of the document.
8323 \begin_layout Standard
8324 When you first open a
8328 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8329 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8345 depending on the document class.
8346 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8347 Each paragraph of the
8351 environment is a bibliography entry.
8356 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8357 Each new paragraph is still in the
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8365 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8366 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8368 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8370 handling, have a look at section
8371 \begin_inset space ~
8375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8377 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8384 \begin_layout Subsection
8385 Special Environments
8388 \begin_layout Standard
8390 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8391 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8412 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8425 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8427 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8432 key as a fixed whitespace.
8436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8449 \begin_inset space ~
8454 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8472 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8475 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8478 arg "newline-insert newline"
8495 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8496 So, when you finish using the
8501 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8502 Also, you can nest the
8507 environment inside of others.
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8511 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8514 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 arg "newline-insert newline"
8521 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8526 \begin_inset space \space{}
8536 arg "newline-insert newline"
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 arg "newline-insert newline"
8556 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8564 You must put at least one
8568 in any line you want blank.
8569 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8574 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8578 since that will insert
8583 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8586 arg "self-insert \""
8592 \begin_layout Standard
8596 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8600 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8604 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8608 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8612 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8613 printf("Hello World!
8618 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8622 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8626 \begin_layout Standard
8627 This is just the standard
8628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8638 \begin_layout Standard
8644 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8646 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8647 as if you used a typewriter.
8648 \begin_inset Index idx
8651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8652 Paragraph environments|)
8657 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8660 Program Code Listings
8665 \begin_inset space ~
8673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8677 \begin_inset Index idx
8680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8689 \begin_layout Standard
8694 environment is similar to the
8699 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8700 computer console text.
8705 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8719 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8720 you can have empty lines.
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 have a certain language and a text style
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8739 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8740 and \SpecialChar TeX
8744 \begin_layout Standard
8745 Because of these properties
8749 works like a typewriter.
8753 \begin_layout Verbatim
8758 \begin_layout Verbatim
8762 The following 2 lines are empty:
8765 \begin_layout Verbatim
8769 \begin_layout Verbatim
8773 \begin_layout Verbatim
8775 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8785 environment is identical to
8789 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8790 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8797 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8802 \begin_layout Section
8803 Nesting Environments
8804 \begin_inset Index idx
8807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8808 Nesting ! Environments
8814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8823 \begin_layout Subsection
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8829 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8831 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8833 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8835 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 \begin_layout Enumerate
8865 \begin_layout Enumerate
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8870 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8871 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8873 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8875 \begin_inset space ~
8879 \begin_inset space ~
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8891 \begin_inset space ~
8896 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8898 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8901 arg "depth-increment"
8907 arg "depth-decrement"
8921 arg "depth-increment"
8927 arg "depth-decrement"
8931 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8932 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8936 \begin_layout Standard
8937 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8938 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8939 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8940 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8941 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8944 \begin_layout Standard
8945 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8947 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8949 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8952 \begin_layout Subsection
8953 What You Can and Can't Nest
8956 \begin_layout Standard
8957 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8958 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8961 \begin_layout Standard
8962 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8963 than a simple yes or no.
8964 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8967 \begin_layout Itemize
8968 Completely unnestable
8971 \begin_layout Itemize
8972 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8976 \begin_layout Itemize
8977 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8982 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8983 environments have them:
8986 \begin_layout Description
8987 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8988 Can't nest into them.
8992 \begin_layout Itemize
8998 \begin_layout Itemize
9004 \begin_layout Itemize
9010 \begin_layout Itemize
9016 \begin_layout Itemize
9023 \begin_layout Description
9025 \begin_inset space ~
9028 Nestable You can nest them.
9029 You can nest other things into them.
9033 \begin_layout Itemize
9039 \begin_layout Itemize
9045 \begin_layout Itemize
9051 \begin_layout Itemize
9057 \begin_layout Itemize
9063 \begin_layout Itemize
9069 \begin_layout Itemize
9075 \begin_layout Itemize
9082 \begin_layout Itemize
9088 \begin_layout Itemize
9095 \begin_layout Description
9096 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9097 You can't nest anything into them.
9101 \begin_layout Itemize
9107 \begin_layout Itemize
9113 \begin_layout Itemize
9119 \begin_layout Itemize
9125 \begin_layout Itemize
9131 \begin_layout Itemize
9137 \begin_layout Itemize
9143 \begin_layout Itemize
9149 \begin_layout Itemize
9155 \begin_layout Itemize
9161 \begin_layout Itemize
9167 \begin_layout Itemize
9173 \begin_layout Itemize
9179 \begin_layout Itemize
9183 \begin_inset space ~
9189 \begin_layout Itemize
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9205 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9215 \begin_inset space ~
9218 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9219 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9220 nested section headings violate this.
9228 \begin_layout Subsection
9229 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9230 \begin_inset Index idx
9233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9234 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9242 \begin_layout Standard
9243 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9244 affected by nesting anyhow.
9248 \begin_layout Itemize
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9256 \begin_layout Itemize
9260 \begin_layout Standard
9262 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9270 Figures and tables in
9274 are not affected by this.
9279 Have a look at section
9280 \begin_inset space ~
9284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9286 reference "sec:Floats"
9290 for more information about
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9299 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9300 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9304 \begin_layout Standard
9305 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9313 of its own, it behaves just like a
9314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9321 paragraph environment.
9322 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 Here's an example with a table:
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 This is (a) and it's nested.
9340 \begin_layout Standard
9341 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9347 \begin_layout Standard
9349 \begin_inset Tabular
9350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9351 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9437 \begin_layout Standard
9438 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9447 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9451 \begin_layout Enumerate
9455 \begin_layout Standard
9456 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9459 \begin_layout Enumerate
9464 \begin_layout Enumerate
9465 This is (a) and it's nested.
9469 \begin_layout Standard
9470 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9476 \begin_layout Standard
9478 \begin_inset Tabular
9479 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9480 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9481 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9482 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9566 \begin_layout Standard
9567 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9573 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9583 \begin_layout Enumerate
9587 \begin_layout Standard
9588 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9592 \begin_layout Standard
9593 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9596 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9599 \begin_layout Enumerate
9604 \begin_layout Enumerate
9605 This is (a) and it's nested.
9608 \begin_layout Standard
9609 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9615 \begin_layout Standard
9617 \begin_inset Tabular
9618 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9619 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9621 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9706 \begin_layout Standard
9707 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9713 \begin_layout Enumerate
9715 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9726 \begin_layout Standard
9727 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9733 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9734 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9738 \begin_layout Subsection
9739 Usage and General Features
9742 \begin_layout Standard
9743 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9744 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9753 is the innermost possible depth.
9754 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9758 level #1 – outermost
9762 \begin_layout Enumerate
9767 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 \begin_layout Enumerate
9777 \begin_layout Itemize
9782 \begin_layout Itemize
9791 \begin_layout Standard
9792 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9793 both of them in the example.
9794 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9804 For example, if we tried to nest another
9809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9816 , we would get errors.
9819 \begin_layout Subsection
9821 \begin_inset Index idx
9824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9833 \begin_layout Standard
9834 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9835 We have several examples of nested environments.
9836 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9841 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9844 \begin_layout Labeling
9845 \labelwidthstring MMM
9846 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9855 \begin_layout Labeling
9856 \labelwidthstring MMM
9857 #2-a This is level #2.
9858 We created it by using
9861 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9867 arg "depth-increment"
9874 \begin_layout Labeling
9875 \labelwidthstring MMM
9876 #3-a This is level #3.
9877 This time, we just enter
9884 arg "depth-increment"
9888 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9892 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9898 arg "depth-increment"
9905 \begin_layout Standard
9910 environment, nested inside of
9911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9919 So, it's at level #4.
9920 We did this by entering
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9929 arg "depth-increment"
9932 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9937 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9953 \begin_layout Standard
9958 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9961 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9967 \begin_layout Labeling
9968 \labelwidthstring MMM
9969 #4-a This is level #4.
9973 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9976 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9981 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9985 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9990 keep nesting things inside
9991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10002 \begin_layout Labeling
10003 \labelwidthstring MMM
10004 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10009 \begin_layout Labeling
10010 \labelwidthstring MMM
10011 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10012 and this is level #6.
10013 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10017 \begin_layout Labeling
10018 \labelwidthstring MMM
10019 #5-b Back to level #5.
10023 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10029 arg "depth-decrement"
10036 \begin_layout Labeling
10037 \labelwidthstring MMM
10041 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10047 arg "depth-decrement"
10050 , we're back at level #4.
10054 \begin_layout Labeling
10055 \labelwidthstring MMM
10056 #3-b Back to level #3.
10057 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10061 \begin_layout Labeling
10062 \labelwidthstring MMM
10063 #2-b Back to level #2.
10067 \begin_layout Labeling
10068 \labelwidthstring MMM
10069 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10070 After this sentence, we will enter
10074 and change the paragraph environment back to
10081 \begin_layout Standard
10082 We could have also used the
10098 environment in place of the
10103 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10107 Example 2: Inheritance
10110 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10111 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10114 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10123 arg "depth-increment"
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 which, we will change to the
10138 \begin_layout Enumerate
10143 environment, at level #2.
10146 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 Notice how the nested
10151 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10155 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10160 We ended this example by entering
10165 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10169 and reset the nesting depth by using
10172 arg "depth-decrement"
10178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10179 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10188 \begin_inset Argument 1
10191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10192 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10200 \begin_layout Enumerate
10201 This is level #1, in an
10205 paragraph environment.
10206 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10210 \begin_layout Enumerate
10215 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10221 arg "depth-increment"
10225 Now, what happens if we nest an
10229 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10230 label be? An asterisk?
10234 \begin_layout Itemize
10244 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10245 So, its label is a bullet.
10246 (We got here by using
10249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10255 arg "depth-increment"
10258 , then changing the environment to
10266 \begin_layout Itemize
10267 Here's level #4, produced using
10270 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10276 arg "depth-increment"
10280 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10285 \begin_layout Enumerate
10287 to get to level #5.
10288 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10293 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10297 , because we are in the
10305 environment (that is, it is an
10320 \begin_layout Enumerate
10325 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10326 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10330 \begin_layout Enumerate
10331 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10334 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10337 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10340 \begin_layout Enumerate
10344 arg "depth-decrement"
10347 to decrease the depth after the next
10350 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10357 \begin_layout Enumerate
10359 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10364 \begin_layout Enumerate
10366 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10367 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10371 \begin_layout Enumerate
10372 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10381 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10386 reset the counter for the label.
10390 \begin_layout Enumerate
10394 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10400 arg "depth-decrement"
10403 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10404 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10405 into the twofold-nested
10413 \begin_layout Enumerate
10414 The same thing happens if we do another
10417 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10423 arg "depth-decrement"
10426 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10435 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10446 The number of other
10450 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10457 The same rule applies for the
10461 environment, as well.
10464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10465 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10468 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10470 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10471 the same detail with how we did it.
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10488 arg "depth-increment"
10495 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10496 the example in parentheses someplace.
10497 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10498 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10499 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10508 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10512 \begin_layout Verse
10513 Now we will add verse.
10514 \begin_inset Newline newline
10517 It will get much worse.
10518 \begin_inset Newline newline
10528 arg "depth-increment"
10538 \begin_layout Verse
10539 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10540 \begin_inset Newline newline
10543 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10544 \begin_inset Newline newline
10550 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10558 \begin_layout Verse
10559 Here comes a table:
10563 \begin_layout Standard
10564 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10572 \begin_inset Tabular
10573 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10574 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10661 \begin_layout Verse
10665 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10675 arg "depth-increment"
10681 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10687 \begin_inset Newline newline
10695 arg "depth-decrement"
10702 \begin_layout Enumerate
10707 : level #1) This is another item.
10708 Note that selecting a
10712 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10713 3 times to put the table inside the
10720 \begin_layout Quotation
10721 We're now ending the
10725 list and changing to
10730 We're still at level #1.
10731 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10732 The next set of paragraphs is a
10733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10740 We will nest both the
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10752 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10756 for the letter body.
10760 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10763 to preserve the depth.
10764 Remember that you need to use
10767 arg "newline-insert newline"
10770 to create multiple lines inside the
10777 \begin_inset space ~
10787 \begin_layout Right Address
10789 \begin_inset Newline newline
10792 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10793 \begin_inset Newline newline
10799 \begin_layout Address
10801 \begin_inset space ~
10807 \begin_layout Quotation
10808 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10812 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10813 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10814 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10815 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10816 as soon as possible.
10817 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10820 \begin_layout Quotation
10821 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10822 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10823 with your order, along with payment.
10826 \begin_layout Quotation
10827 We thank you again for your patience.
10830 \begin_layout Address
10832 \begin_inset Newline newline
10839 \begin_layout Quotation
10840 That ends that example!
10843 \begin_layout Standard
10844 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10845 gives you a lot of power with just
10847 We could have easily nested an
10868 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10871 \begin_layout Subsection
10873 \begin_inset Index idx
10876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10877 Nesting ! Separation
10883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10885 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10892 \begin_layout Standard
10893 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10895 For example you need two different enumerations:
10898 \begin_layout Enumerate
10903 \begin_layout Enumerate
10908 \begin_layout Enumerate
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10913 \begin_inset Separator plain
10919 \begin_layout Itemize
10925 \begin_layout Standard
10926 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10932 \begin_layout Enumerate
10936 \begin_layout Enumerate
10940 \begin_layout Enumerate
10944 \begin_layout Standard
10945 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10946 list item and use the menu
10948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10949 Separated <Name> Above
10953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10954 Separated <Name> Below
10957 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10958 ) and before or behind it the
10960 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10963 \begin_layout Standard
10964 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10965 (red arrow in LyX).
10966 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10967 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10970 \begin_layout Standard
10971 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10974 arg "paragraph-break"
10981 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10984 \begin_layout Section
10985 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10986 \begin_inset Index idx
10989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10998 \begin_layout Standard
10999 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11000 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11002 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11003 be broken at the end of a line.
11004 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11008 \begin_layout Subsection
11010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11012 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11017 \begin_inset Index idx
11020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 \begin_layout Standard
11030 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11031 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11032 ) not to break the line at
11034 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11037 \begin_layout Quote
11038 Further documentation is given in section
11039 \begin_inset Newline newline
11043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11045 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11053 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11068 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11077 A protected space is set with
11079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11080 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11082 \begin_inset space ~
11090 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11096 \begin_layout Subsection
11098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11100 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11105 \begin_inset Index idx
11108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 Spacing ! Horizontal
11117 \begin_layout Standard
11118 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11121 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11125 The length units are listed in Appendix
11126 \begin_inset space ~
11130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11132 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11143 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11148 \begin_inset Index idx
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11152 Spaces ! Inter-word
11160 \begin_layout Standard
11161 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11162 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11163 at the ends of sentences.
11164 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11165 automatically takes care about this.
11166 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11167 followed by a period; see section
11168 \begin_inset space ~
11172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11174 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11179 To insert a normal space, select
11181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11182 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11184 \begin_inset space ~
11192 arg "space-insert normal"
11198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11202 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11207 \begin_inset Index idx
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 \begin_layout Standard
11221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11228 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11237 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11238 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11239 inside abbreviations:
11242 \begin_layout Quote
11244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11248 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11251 \begin_layout Standard
11252 or between values and units.
11253 Compare for example this:
11254 \begin_inset Newline newline
11258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11262 \begin_inset Newline newline
11265 10 kg (normal space
11268 \begin_layout Standard
11269 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11272 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11274 \begin_inset space ~
11282 arg "space-insert thin"
11288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11292 \begin_layout Standard
11293 You can also insert the following space types:
11296 \begin_layout Description
11298 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11300 \begin_inset space ~
11306 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11310 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11314 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11318 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11320 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11323 space between the arrows.
11324 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11328 \begin_layout Description
11330 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11332 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11336 \begin_inset space ~
11339 space A line with a
11340 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11344 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11348 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11352 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11354 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11357 space between the arrows.
11360 \begin_layout Description
11362 \begin_inset space ~
11366 \begin_inset space ~
11369 space A line with a
11370 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11374 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11378 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11381 negative thin space between the arrows.
11384 \begin_layout Description
11386 \begin_inset space ~
11390 \begin_inset space ~
11393 space A line with a
11394 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11398 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11402 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11405 negative medium space between the arrows.
11408 \begin_layout Description
11410 \begin_inset space ~
11414 \begin_inset space ~
11417 space A line with a
11418 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11422 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11426 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11429 negative thick space between the arrows.
11432 \begin_layout Description
11434 \begin_inset space ~
11438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11442 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11446 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11450 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11454 \begin_inset space ~
11458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11461 em) space between the arrows.
11464 \begin_layout Description
11466 \begin_inset space ~
11470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11478 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11482 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11486 \begin_inset space ~
11490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11493 em) space between the arrows.
11496 \begin_layout Description
11498 \begin_inset space ~
11502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11506 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11510 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11514 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11525 em) space between the arrows.
11528 \begin_layout Description
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11538 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11543 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11550 cm space between the arrows.
11553 \begin_layout Standard
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11561 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11565 lists the different space sizes.
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11569 \begin_inset Float table
11576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11577 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11582 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11586 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11596 \begin_inset Tabular
11597 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11598 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11599 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11600 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11697 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11703 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11714 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11725 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11731 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11772 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11931 \begin_inset Index idx
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11945 feature for adding extra space
11946 in a uniform fashion.
11947 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11948 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11949 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11950 equally between themselves.
11953 \begin_layout Standard
11954 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11957 \begin_layout Quote
11959 This is on the left side
11960 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11963 This is on the right
11966 \begin_layout Quote
11969 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11979 \begin_layout Quote
11982 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11986 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11990 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11996 \begin_layout Standard
11997 That was an example in the
12003 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12007 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12011 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12014 is one in a standard paragraph.
12015 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12019 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12022 \begin_layout Standard
12023 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12026 \begin_inset space ~
12031 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12034 \begin_layout Standard
12036 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12040 \begin_inset space ~
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12052 \begin_inset space ~
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12064 \begin_inset space ~
12070 \begin_layout Standard
12072 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12076 \begin_inset space ~
12082 \begin_layout Standard
12084 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12086 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12090 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12091 (= opened downwards)
12094 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12098 \begin_inset space ~
12104 \begin_layout Standard
12106 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12108 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12112 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12116 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12126 \begin_layout Standard
12127 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12135 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12139 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12141 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12142 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12146 option in the space dialog.
12154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12158 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12163 \begin_inset Index idx
12166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12175 \begin_layout Standard
12176 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12177 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12184 What is correct English?:
12185 \begin_inset Newline newline
12189 \begin_inset Newline newline
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12196 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12197 \begin_inset Newline newline
12201 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12212 \begin_inset Newline newline
12216 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12227 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12233 \begin_layout Standard
12235 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12240 \begin_inset space ~
12244 \begin_inset space ~
12248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12252 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12255 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12259 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12276 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12285 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12286 That is why it is named
12287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12295 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12296 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12300 \begin_layout Subsection
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12304 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12309 \begin_inset Index idx
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12321 \begin_layout Standard
12322 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12324 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12325 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12327 \begin_inset space ~
12333 There you find the following sizes:
12336 \begin_layout Standard
12349 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12350 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12355 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12358 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12360 \begin_inset space ~
12366 \begin_inset Index idx
12369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12370 Document ! Settings
12375 for the paragraph separation.
12376 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12385 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12391 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12400 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12401 size including line spacing.
12406 \begin_layout Standard
12412 \begin_inset Index idx
12415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12421 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12422 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12427 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12428 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12437 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12446 s are described in section
12447 \begin_inset space ~
12451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12453 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12462 If there are several
12466 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12467 You can therefore use
12471 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12474 \begin_layout Standard
12479 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12480 \begin_inset space ~
12484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12486 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12494 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12504 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12505 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12517 \begin_layout Subsection
12518 Paragraph Alignment
12519 \begin_inset Index idx
12522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12523 Paragraph ! Alignment
12531 \begin_layout Standard
12532 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12537 dialog (toolbar button
12540 arg "layout-paragraph"
12544 There are five possibilities:
12547 \begin_layout Itemize
12555 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12561 \begin_layout Itemize
12569 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12575 \begin_layout Itemize
12583 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12589 \begin_layout Itemize
12597 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12603 \begin_layout Itemize
12611 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12617 \begin_layout Standard
12618 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12619 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12620 the left and right margins.
12621 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12624 \begin_layout Standard
12626 This paragraph is right aligned,
12629 \begin_layout Standard
12631 this one is centered,
12634 \begin_layout Standard
12636 this one is left aligned.
12639 \begin_layout Subsection
12641 \begin_inset Index idx
12644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12645 Page breaks ! Forced
12651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12653 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12660 \begin_layout Standard
12661 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12662 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12663 force a page break where you want one.
12664 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12665 is good at page breaking.
12666 Only if you use a lot of
12670 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12674 \begin_layout Standard
12675 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12676 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12680 have to change the page breaking.
12683 \begin_layout Standard
12684 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12686 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12689 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12691 \begin_inset space ~
12697 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12700 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12702 \begin_inset space ~
12707 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12709 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12710 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12713 \begin_layout Standard
12714 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12715 at the top of a page.
12716 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12718 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12719 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12720 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12724 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12728 to learn more about
12735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12739 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12744 \begin_inset Index idx
12747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 Page breaks ! Clear
12756 \begin_layout Standard
12757 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12758 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12759 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12760 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12761 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12765 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12776 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12779 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12781 \begin_inset space ~
12785 \begin_inset space ~
12790 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12791 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12792 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
12796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12798 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
12799 Suppressing Page Breaks
12802 \begin_inset Index idx
12805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12807 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
12811 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
12820 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
12824 \begin_layout Standard
12826 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
12827 To discourage page break at certain point you can use
12831 \SpecialChar menuseparator
12833 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
12836 \SpecialChar menuseparator
12838 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
12845 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
12846 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
12847 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
12848 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
12853 \begin_layout Subsection
12855 \begin_inset Index idx
12858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12867 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12874 \begin_layout Standard
12875 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12877 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12880 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12882 \begin_inset space ~
12886 \begin_inset space ~
12894 arg "newline-insert newline"
12898 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12901 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12903 \begin_inset space ~
12907 \begin_inset space ~
12915 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12918 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12920 This is useful to avoid
12921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12928 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12931 \begin_layout Standard
12932 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12933 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12935 very good at line breaking.
12936 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12937 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12944 reference "sec:Quote"
12949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12951 reference "sec:Verse"
12956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12958 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12965 \begin_layout Subsection
12967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12969 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12974 \begin_inset Index idx
12977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12986 \begin_layout Standard
12988 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12999 \begin_layout Standard
13003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13004 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13006 \begin_inset space ~
13011 you can insert horizontal lines.
13012 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13013 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13014 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13017 \begin_layout Standard
13019 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13030 \begin_layout Section
13031 Characters and Symbols
13034 \begin_layout Standard
13035 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13036 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13037 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13045 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13049 for information on how this is done.
13052 \begin_layout Standard
13053 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13058 dialog via the menu
13060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13061 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13067 \begin_layout Standard
13068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13076 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13077 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13079 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13087 \begin_layout Section
13088 Fonts and Text Styles
13089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13091 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13098 \begin_layout Subsection
13100 \begin_inset Index idx
13103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13112 \begin_layout Standard
13113 There are two types of fonts:
13116 \begin_layout Description
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13122 \begin_inset Index idx
13125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13131 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13136 characters) in the font.
13137 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13138 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13139 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13140 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13141 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13142 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13143 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13144 \begin_inset Newline newline
13147 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13148 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13149 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13150 sizes than at small ones.
13151 \begin_inset Newline newline
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13173 \begin_layout Description
13175 \begin_inset space ~
13179 \begin_inset Index idx
13182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13188 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13189 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13190 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13191 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13192 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13193 image manipulation program.
13194 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13195 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13199 pixels high up to 34
13200 \begin_inset space ~
13203 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13204 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13205 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13207 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13208 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13209 \begin_inset Newline newline
13212 Bitmap fonts are named
13215 \begin_inset space ~
13220 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13223 \begin_layout Standard
13224 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13225 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13226 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13227 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13228 use scalable fonts.
13231 \begin_layout Standard
13232 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13235 \begin_layout Standard
13236 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13240 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13243 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13244 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13245 font, to emphasize text you use an
13246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13254 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13256 In \SpecialChar LyX
13257 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13261 \begin_layout Subsection
13264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13266 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13274 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13275 used its own fonts.
13276 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13277 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13280 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13281 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13282 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13283 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13284 to a word processor.
13285 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13286 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13287 files are very portable across
13288 different machines.
13289 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13290 has increased a lot
13291 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13294 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13296 \begin_inset space ~
13300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13302 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13307 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13308 code in the document
13309 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13312 \begin_layout Standard
13313 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13314 engines that are also able directly
13315 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13317 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13319 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13321 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13322 that is installed on your system.
13323 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13326 \begin_layout Standard
13327 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13335 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13336 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13344 \begin_layout Subsection
13345 Document Font and Font size
13346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13348 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13353 \begin_inset Index idx
13356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13363 \begin_inset Index idx
13366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13375 \begin_layout Standard
13376 You can set the document fonts in the
13378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13382 \begin_inset Index idx
13385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13386 Document ! Settings
13396 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13397 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13409 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13411 \begin_inset space ~
13414 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13417 \begin_layout Standard
13422 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13423 This requires that you use
13435 as the output format, i.
13436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13440 \begin_inset space \space{}
13443 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13444 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13445 installed (see section
13446 \begin_inset space ~
13450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13452 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13457 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13459 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13460 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13465 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13466 cannot determine the family.
13467 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13468 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13471 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13474 \begin_layout Standard
13475 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13476 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13481 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13487 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13489 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13491 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13494 font encoding, this is
13495 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13496 , depending on the document language,
13499 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13500 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13508 \begin_inset space ~
13514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13524 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13525 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13533 \begin_inset space ~
13539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13547 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 European Computer Modern
13571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13579 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13582 \begin_layout Standard
13587 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13588 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13593 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13596 \begin_inset space ~
13601 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13607 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13608 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13611 \begin_layout Itemize
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13620 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13638 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13639 community in order to replace
13643 as the default font.
13644 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13645 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13648 \begin_inset space ~
13661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13662 One difference is improved kerning.
13670 \begin_layout Itemize
13671 If you do not like the look of
13679 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13684 \begin_inset space ~
13690 \begin_inset space ~
13700 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13701 \begin_inset space ~
13704 serif and typewriter fonts,
13708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13709 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13716 \begin_inset space ~
13725 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13730 \begin_inset space \space{}
13738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13742 \begin_inset space \space{}
13748 \begin_inset space ~
13756 \begin_inset space ~
13766 but you can also select your own.
13767 \begin_inset Newline newline
13770 The differences between roman,
13773 \begin_inset space ~
13782 fonts are explained in section
13783 \begin_inset space ~
13787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13789 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13794 \begin_inset Newline newline
13800 \begin_inset space ~
13805 was originally designed for newspapers.
13806 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13807 into the small newspaper columns.
13811 \begin_inset space ~
13816 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13819 \begin_layout Standard
13820 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13833 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13838 depends on the class you are using.
13839 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13843 Note that the font size is the
13848 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13849 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13850 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13851 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13854 \begin_inset space ~
13860 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13861 \begin_inset space ~
13865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13867 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13874 \begin_layout Standard
13878 \begin_inset space ~
13883 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13885 \begin_inset space ~
13888 serif or typewriter.
13893 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13903 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13906 \begin_layout Standard
13911 LaTeX font encoding
13913 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13914 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13920 \begin_inset Index idx
13923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13931 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13933 \begin_inset space ~
13937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13939 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13946 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13947 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13948 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13952 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13960 \begin_layout Standard
13961 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13963 Use Old Style Figures
13967 Use True Small Caps
13970 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13973 Use Old Style Figures
13975 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13977 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13985 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13989 Use True Small Caps
13991 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13992 of scaled capitals.
13993 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13994 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13995 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13999 \begin_layout Standard
14001 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14002 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14003 provided by the font package (or the
14007 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14012 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14018 \begin_layout Standard
14023 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14024 a font to display the script characters.
14028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14029 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14035 \begin_inset Index idx
14038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14045 So this has no effect for the document language
14061 \begin_layout Standard
14064 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14066 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14067 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14073 \begin_inset Index idx
14076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14078 packages ! microtype
14087 \begin_layout Standard
14090 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14092 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14097 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14098 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14104 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14105 \begin_inset space ~
14109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14111 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14121 \begin_layout Standard
14122 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14126 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14134 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14139 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14140 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14142 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14144 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14147 dialog, see section
14148 \begin_inset space ~
14152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14154 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14166 \begin_layout Subsection
14170 \begin_layout Standard
14171 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14172 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14174 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14175 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14176 choose a math font in the dialog
14178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14182 \begin_inset Index idx
14185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14186 Document ! Settings
14192 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14193 automatically selects a math font.
14194 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14195 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14204 \begin_inset space ~
14210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14215 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14216 document font is available.
14219 \begin_layout Standard
14220 Note that the math font will not be used for
14224 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14230 or by the insertion of the command
14237 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14238 \begin_inset space ~
14242 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14243 while the math characters do not.
14245 \begin_inset space ~
14248 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14251 \begin_inset space ~
14259 \begin_inset space ~
14264 in the document font settings.
14267 \begin_layout Standard
14268 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14269 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14270 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14271 font (in most cases
14272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14278 \begin_inset space ~
14284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14287 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14288 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14296 \begin_inset space ~
14302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14308 \begin_layout Subsection
14310 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14312 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14316 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14320 name "subsec:charstyles"
14327 \begin_inset Index idx
14330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14337 \begin_inset Index idx
14340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14349 \begin_layout Standard
14350 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14351 automatically changes the
14352 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14355 style for certain paragraph environments.
14357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14358 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14360 This is where we meet the concept of
14366 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14368 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14372 \begin_layout Standard
14374 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14379 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14381 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14403 e., available with all document classes.
14404 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14408 for specific purposes.
14409 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14412 \begin_layout Standard
14414 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14415 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14425 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14429 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14442 — you customized the
14447 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14448 among them, encourage the use of
14460 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14461 \begin_inset space ~
14465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14467 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14472 Rather than fiddling with
14476 , they encourage the use of
14480 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14485 \begin_inset Quotes els
14489 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14492 ), not their form (
14493 \begin_inset Quotes els
14497 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14501 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14502 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14503 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14504 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14505 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14506 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14512 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14516 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14517 With a semantic markup (such as
14521 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14526 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14528 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14529 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14532 \begin_layout Standard
14534 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14535 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14536 by \SpecialChar LyX
14542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14544 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14545 Builtin Text Styles
14546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14548 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14555 \begin_layout Standard
14557 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14558 The two builtin text styles can be
14559 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14563 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14567 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14568 both of these styles
14571 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14579 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14585 \begin_layout Standard
14590 style, do one of the following:
14593 \begin_layout Itemize
14594 click on the toolbar button
14603 \begin_layout Itemize
14604 use the key binding
14611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14615 \begin_layout Itemize
14617 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14625 arg "dialog-show character"
14631 arg "dialog-show character"
14634 ) as described in section
14635 \begin_inset space ~
14639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14641 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14650 \begin_layout Standard
14651 These commands are all toggles.
14656 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14659 \begin_layout Standard
14660 One typically uses the
14664 style for proper names.
14666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14673 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14683 \begin_layout Standard
14685 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14690 is producing text in
14694 , but the definition can be changed.
14699 \begin_layout Standard
14701 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14711 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14718 \begin_layout Itemize
14719 clicking on the toolbar button
14728 \begin_layout Itemize
14729 using the keybindings
14736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14740 \begin_layout Itemize
14742 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14750 arg "dialog-show character"
14756 arg "dialog-show character"
14759 ) as described in section
14760 \begin_inset space ~
14764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14766 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14775 \begin_layout Standard
14780 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14784 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14787 packages use a different font
14788 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14789 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14795 \begin_layout Standard
14796 We've been using the
14800 style all over the place in this document.
14801 Here's one more example:
14804 \begin_layout Quotation
14808 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14816 \begin_layout Standard
14817 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14818 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14819 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14820 the common tendency to overuse
14821 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14823 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14828 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14834 \begin_layout Standard
14836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14837 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14838 only as font changes and integrated in the
14846 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14849 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14856 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14862 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14870 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14878 arg "dialog-show character"
14884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14886 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14892 arg "dialog-show character"
14896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14906 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14913 \begin_layout Standard
14915 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14916 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14918 \begin_inset space ~
14922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14924 reference "subsec:Modules"
14931 ), or local layout settings (see section
14932 \begin_inset space ~
14936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14938 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14943 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14947 markup for specific functions.
14948 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14953 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14963 \begin_inset Quotes els
14967 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14973 \begin_layout Standard
14975 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14976 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14978 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14984 \begin_layout Standard
14986 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14987 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14992 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14993 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14994 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14999 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15000 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15005 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15013 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15014 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15015 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15016 \begin_inset Flex Code
15019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15030 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15035 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15044 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15049 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15058 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15059 on screen their formal appearance.
15064 \begin_layout Subsection
15066 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15078 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15086 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15094 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15099 \begin_inset Index idx
15102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15111 \begin_layout Standard
15112 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15116 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15120 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15124 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15125 the properties of text passages
15126 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15130 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15131 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15132 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15133 from ordinary dialog.
15134 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15138 \begin_layout Standard
15140 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15141 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15142 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15143 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15144 the properties of the respective text passages.
15149 comes in as a last resort.
15154 \begin_layout Standard
15155 Before we document how to
15156 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15157 use custom character style
15158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15159 tweak the text properties
15161 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15162 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15168 \begin_inset Newline newline
15171 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15172 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15175 \begin_layout Standard
15177 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15178 use custom character styles
15179 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15180 tweak text properties
15183 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15186 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15188 \begin_inset space ~
15191 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15193 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15199 arg "dialog-show character"
15204 dialog or press the toolbar button
15207 arg "dialog-show character"
15212 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15215 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15216 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15218 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15221 property that you can choose.
15222 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15225 \begin_inset space ~
15230 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15232 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15243 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15244 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15245 environments all at once.
15248 \begin_layout Standard
15250 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15255 properties, and their options (in addition to
15258 \begin_inset space ~
15264 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15276 \begin_layout Labeling
15277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15291 The possible options are:
15295 \begin_layout Labeling
15296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15301 This is the Roman font family.
15302 Normally a serif font.
15303 It's also the default family.
15313 \begin_layout Labeling
15314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15318 \begin_inset space ~
15325 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15337 \begin_layout Labeling
15338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15345 This is the Typewriter font family.
15351 arg "font-typewriter"
15357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15361 \begin_layout Standard
15363 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15364 The general differences of these families are:
15367 \begin_layout Itemize
15369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15374 fonts use characters with serifs.
15375 These are the small
15376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15383 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15384 The following example shows the difference:
15385 \begin_inset Newline newline
15389 \begin_inset Newline newline
15394 text without serifs
15397 \begin_inset Newline newline
15400 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15401 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15408 \begin_layout Itemize
15410 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15415 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15416 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15417 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15420 \begin_layout Itemize
15422 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15435 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15453 \begin_inset Newline newline
15457 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15475 \begin_inset Note Note
15478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15480 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15481 For more on phantoms see section
15482 \begin_inset space ~
15486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15488 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15498 \begin_inset Newline newline
15507 \begin_layout Labeling
15508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15513 This corresponds to the print weight.
15518 \begin_layout Labeling
15519 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15524 This is the Medium font series.
15525 It's also the default series.
15528 \begin_layout Labeling
15529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15536 This is the Bold font series.
15549 \begin_layout Labeling
15550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15555 As the name implies.
15560 \begin_layout Labeling
15561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15566 This is the Upright font shape.
15567 It's also the default shape.
15570 \begin_layout Labeling
15571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15586 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15591 s the Italic font shape
15597 \begin_layout Labeling
15598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15605 This is the Slanted font shape
15607 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15608 , this is different from italic).
15611 \begin_layout Labeling
15612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15616 \begin_inset space ~
15623 This is the Small caps font shape
15630 \begin_layout Labeling
15631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15636 Alters the text color.
15637 Note that not all DVI
15638 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15640 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15643 viewers are able to display colors.
15645 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15649 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15651 \begin_inset space ~
15658 , which means that the document default color set in
15660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15661 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15667 \begin_inset space ~
15673 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15679 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15759 \begin_inset Index idx
15762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15769 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15775 \begin_layout Labeling
15776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15781 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15782 the language of the document.
15783 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15784 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15785 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15788 in blue to indicate the change
15789 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15790 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15794 \begin_inset Newline newline
15797 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15799 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15800 When using the spell checking (see section
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15807 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15811 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15812 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15814 \begin_inset Newline newline
15817 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15819 Exclude from Spellchecking
15822 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15825 \begin_layout Labeling
15826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15831 Alters the size of the font.
15833 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15835 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15839 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15842 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15843 document font size.
15844 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15845 the details, but a general description of what
15851 \begin_layout Labeling
15852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15873 arg "font-size tiny"
15879 \begin_layout Labeling
15880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15901 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15907 \begin_layout Labeling
15908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15929 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15935 \begin_layout Labeling
15936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15957 arg "font-size small"
15963 \begin_layout Labeling
15964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15978 It's also the default size.
15982 arg "font-size normal"
15988 \begin_layout Labeling
15989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 arg "font-size large"
16016 \begin_layout Labeling
16017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16038 arg "font-size larger"
16044 \begin_layout Labeling
16045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16066 arg "font-size largest"
16072 \begin_layout Labeling
16073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16094 arg "font-size huge"
16100 \begin_layout Labeling
16101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16122 arg "font-size giant"
16128 \begin_layout Labeling
16129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16134 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16154 arg "font-size increase"
16160 \begin_layout Labeling
16161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16166 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16186 arg "font-size decrease"
16193 \begin_layout Standard
16198 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16199 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16201 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16202 — use those instead.
16203 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16206 \begin_layout Labeling
16207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16209 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16219 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16220 change a few other things at the character level
16221 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16222 have text passages being underlined
16226 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16227 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16228 days, when you could not change fonts.
16229 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16230 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16231 because some people
16235 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16242 \begin_layout Labeling
16243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16245 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16252 This is text with emphasize on
16255 This might seem like the same as
16259 , but it is actually a bit different.
16265 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16267 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16272 \begin_layout Labeling
16273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16275 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16280 Don't use underlining.
16285 \begin_layout Labeling
16286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16288 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16292 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16302 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16311 arg "font-underline"
16317 \begin_inset Newline newline
16321 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16324 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16325 when you could not change fonts.
16326 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16327 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16328 because some people
16332 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16337 \begin_layout Labeling
16338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16344 \begin_inset space ~
16353 This is text with Double under
16354 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16356 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16365 arg "font-underunderline"
16369 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16371 \begin_inset Newline newline
16374 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16375 about double underbar
16380 \begin_layout Labeling
16381 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16385 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16387 \begin_inset space ~
16396 This is text with Wavy under
16397 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16399 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16408 arg "font-underwave"
16412 \begin_inset Newline newline
16415 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16416 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16417 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16422 \begin_layout Labeling
16423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16430 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16436 \begin_layout Labeling
16437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16439 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16444 Don't use strikethrough.
16447 \begin_layout Labeling
16448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16452 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16454 \begin_inset space ~
16458 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16466 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16468 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16469 Single strikethrough
16477 arg "font-strikeout"
16481 \begin_inset Newline newline
16484 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16485 changed in the meantime.
16488 \begin_layout Labeling
16489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16491 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16495 \begin_inset space ~
16499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16501 \begin_inset space ~
16505 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16513 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16515 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16521 \begin_inset Newline newline
16524 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16528 \begin_layout Standard
16530 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16531 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16532 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16539 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16546 \begin_layout Itemize
16548 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16555 This is text with emphasize on
16560 \begin_layout Itemize
16564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16571 This is text with Noun on.
16573 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16580 , this is a logical attribute.
16581 Normally it's equivalent to
16584 \begin_inset space ~
16594 \begin_layout Standard
16595 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16596 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16598 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16603 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16604 chosen a new character style
16605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16606 applied a text property
16609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16612 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16614 \begin_inset space ~
16617 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16619 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16625 arg "dialog-show character"
16633 arg "dialog-show character"
16636 ) dialog, the settings are
16637 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16641 You can activate the
16642 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16644 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16645 last applied properties
16647 by using the toolbar button
16650 arg "textstyle-apply"
16654 The button lets you apply
16655 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16656 your custom character style
16657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16660 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16662 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16663 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16664 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16665 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16670 \begin_layout Standard
16671 To completely reset the
16672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16675 text properties of a selection
16677 to the default, use
16678 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16680 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16690 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16695 from the menu of the toolbar button
16698 arg "textstyle-apply"
16705 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16706 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16707 you just set the shape to
16708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16726 \begin_inset space ~
16740 \begin_layout Standard
16742 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16743 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16751 \begin_inset space ~
16763 \begin_layout Itemize
16765 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16778 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16796 \begin_inset Newline newline
16800 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16814 \begin_inset Note Note
16817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16818 For more on phantoms see section
16819 \begin_inset space ~
16823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16825 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16835 \begin_inset Newline newline
16841 \begin_layout Itemize
16843 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16848 fonts use characters with serifs.
16849 These are the small
16850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16857 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16858 The following example shows the difference:
16859 \begin_inset Newline newline
16863 \begin_inset Newline newline
16868 text without serifs
16871 \begin_inset Newline newline
16874 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16875 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16882 \begin_layout Itemize
16884 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16889 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16890 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16891 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16896 \begin_layout Standard
16898 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16906 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16907 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16910 \begin_inset space ~
16915 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16916 the property to be removed.
16917 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16918 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16919 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16937 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16938 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16946 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16950 \begin_inset space ~
16955 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16966 If you, for example, set
16967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16985 \begin_inset space ~
16990 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16999 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17004 \begin_layout Standard
17006 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17009 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17010 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17013 \begin_layout Section
17014 Printing and Previewing
17017 \begin_layout Subsection
17021 \begin_layout Standard
17022 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17023 using \SpecialChar LyX
17024 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17025 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17026 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17027 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17029 Additional Features
17034 \begin_layout Standard
17036 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17039 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17040 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17041 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17044 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17045 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17046 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17047 to turn your writing into printable output.
17048 This happens in two stages:
17051 \begin_layout Enumerate
17052 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17053 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17055 a file with the extension,
17056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17070 \begin_layout Enumerate
17071 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17072 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17073 to use the commands in the
17077 file to produce printable output.
17080 \begin_layout Subsection
17081 Output file formats
17082 \begin_inset Index idx
17085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17094 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17101 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17103 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17105 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17109 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17113 \begin_inset Index idx
17116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17118 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17120 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17131 \begin_layout Standard
17132 This file type has the extension
17133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17145 It contains your document as plain text
17146 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17148 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17149 following the rules of the
17150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17153 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17162 \begin_layout Standard
17163 You can export your document to
17164 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17166 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17171 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17172 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17174 \begin_inset space ~
17180 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17181 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17182 bibliography (section
17183 \begin_inset space ~
17187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17189 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17194 If your document includes such material, use
17196 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17197 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17199 \begin_inset space ~
17203 \begin_inset space ~
17207 \begin_inset space ~
17215 \begin_inset space ~
17219 \begin_inset space ~
17225 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17226 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17227 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17229 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17238 \begin_inset Index idx
17241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17242 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 This file type has the extension
17253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17264 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17267 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17268 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17269 -Errors or to process it manually
17270 with console commands.
17271 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17272 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17273 's temporary directory whenever you
17274 view or export your document.
17277 \begin_layout Standard
17278 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17279 -file using the menu
17281 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17282 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17286 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17287 export variants are explained in section
17288 \begin_inset space ~
17292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17294 reference "subsec:Export"
17301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17303 \begin_inset Index idx
17306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17315 \begin_layout Standard
17316 This file type has the extension
17317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17337 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17338 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17339 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17343 \begin_layout Standard
17344 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17345 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17346 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17347 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17348 when you view the DVI.
17349 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17352 \begin_layout Standard
17353 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17355 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17356 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17361 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17362 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17364 \begin_inset space ~
17370 The latter option uses the program
17372 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17378 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17381 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17382 font access (see section
17383 \begin_inset space ~
17387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17389 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17394 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17395 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17402 \begin_inset Index idx
17405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17406 File formats ! PostScript
17414 \begin_layout Standard
17415 This file type has the extension
17416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17428 PostScript was developed by the company
17432 as a printer language.
17433 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17435 PostScript can be seen as a
17436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17439 programming language
17440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17443 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17448 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17455 \begin_inset Index idx
17458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17460 packages ! pstricks
17470 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17473 \begin_layout Standard
17474 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17478 Encapsulated PostScript
17479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17482 (EPS, file extension
17483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17495 As \SpecialChar LyX
17496 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17497 convert them in the background to EPS.
17498 If, for example, you have 50
17499 \begin_inset space ~
17502 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17504 \begin_inset space ~
17507 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17508 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17510 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17511 EPS to avoid this problem.
17514 \begin_layout Standard
17515 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17517 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17518 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17526 \begin_inset Index idx
17529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17536 \begin_inset Index idx
17539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17548 \begin_layout Standard
17549 This file type has the extension
17550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17566 Portable Document Format
17567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17574 was derived from PostScript.
17575 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17584 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17585 looks exactly the same.
17588 \begin_layout Standard
17589 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17593 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17597 (JPG, file extension
17598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17625 Portable Network Graphics
17626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17629 (PNG, file extension
17630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17642 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17643 converts them in the
17644 background to one of these formats.
17645 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17646 will slow down your workflow.
17647 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17651 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17659 \begin_layout Description
17661 \begin_inset space ~
17664 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17668 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17671 \begin_layout Description
17673 \begin_inset space ~
17680 ) This uses the program
17682 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17685 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17688 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17691 is a new engine, derived from
17695 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17696 access (see section
17697 \begin_inset space ~
17701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17703 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17708 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17709 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17714 \begin_layout Description
17716 \begin_inset space ~
17723 ) This uses the program
17728 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17734 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17735 font access (see section
17736 \begin_inset space ~
17740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17742 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17747 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17748 vertically written Japanese.
17751 \begin_layout Description
17753 \begin_inset space ~
17756 (cropped) This is the same as
17759 \begin_inset space ~
17764 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17765 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17766 to generate good-looking
17767 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17770 \begin_layout Description
17772 \begin_inset space ~
17775 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17779 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17783 \begin_layout Description
17785 \begin_inset space ~
17788 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17792 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17793 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17797 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17798 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17801 \begin_layout Standard
17805 \begin_inset space ~
17814 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17815 works without problems.
17816 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17817 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17821 \begin_inset space ~
17829 \begin_inset space ~
17834 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17844 \begin_inset Index idx
17847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17848 FileFormats ! XHTML
17854 \begin_inset Index idx
17857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17866 \begin_layout Standard
17867 This file type has the extension
17868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17880 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17881 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17882 When \SpecialChar LyX
17883 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17884 suitable for the purpose.
17885 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17888 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17891 between different formats, which are described in section
17893 Math Output in XHTML
17898 \begin_inset space ~
17906 \begin_layout Standard
17907 XHTML output remains
17908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17915 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17916 features are supported yet.
17920 and the World Wide Web
17924 Additional Features
17926 manual, for more information.
17929 \begin_layout Standard
17930 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17932 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17933 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17939 \begin_layout Subsection
17941 \begin_inset Index idx
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17954 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17955 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17964 or use the toolbar button
17971 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17972 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17973 \begin_inset space ~
17977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17979 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17983 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17985 \begin_inset space ~
17989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17991 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17996 Further output formats can be selected via
17998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17999 View (Other Formats)
18001 or the toolbar button
18010 \begin_layout Standard
18011 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18012 viewer window using the menu
18014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18019 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18020 Update (Other Formats)
18025 \begin_layout Standard
18026 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18029 To have a real output, export your document.
18032 \begin_layout Section
18033 A few Words about Typography
18034 \begin_inset Index idx
18037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18046 \begin_layout Subsection
18047 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18048 \begin_inset Index idx
18051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18058 \begin_inset Index idx
18061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 \begin_layout Standard
18071 In \SpecialChar LyX
18073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18084 symbol comes in four variants: the
18101 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18107 \begin_layout Standard
18108 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18118 height_special "totalheight"
18123 backgroundcolor "none"
18126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18127 \begin_inset Tabular
18128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18129 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18130 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18131 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18132 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18133 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18134 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18162 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18202 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18203 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 system key combination
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18242 and the em dash with
18245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18258 is the Mac label for the right
18268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18281 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18304 system key combination or
18305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18332 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18371 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18377 \begin_layout Standard
18378 Dashes can also be inserted with
18380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18382 \begin_inset space ~
18385 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18393 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18394 and 2014 for the en dash).
18397 \begin_layout Standard
18398 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18399 mode and has a length of its own.
18400 Here are some examples:
18403 \begin_layout Enumerate
18404 line- and page-breaks
18405 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18415 \begin_layout Enumerate
18417 \begin_inset space ~
18421 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18431 \begin_layout Enumerate
18432 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18443 \begin_layout Enumerate
18444 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18458 \begin_layout Standard
18460 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18462 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18463 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18471 \begin_layout Subsection
18472 Dashes and Line Breaks
18473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18475 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18482 \begin_layout Standard
18483 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18484 case and locale, e.
18485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18491 \begin_layout Itemize
18492 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18493 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18496 \begin_layout Itemize
18497 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18501 \begin_layout Itemize
18502 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18503 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18506 \begin_layout Standard
18507 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18508 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18519 allows line breaks after hyphens
18520 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18522 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18525 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18528 \begin_layout Enumerate
18529 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18530 \begin_inset space ~
18533 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18535 The Elements of Typographic Style
18538 \begin_inset space ~
18541 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18544 \begin_layout Enumerate
18545 Unwanted line breaks
18550 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18552 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18555 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18562 Prevent Hyphenation
18567 \begin_inset space ~
18583 in \SpecialChar TeX
18585 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18586 , a protected space does not suffice
18590 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18597 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18598 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18599 in the document language.
18600 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18614 \begin_layout Itemize
18616 \begin_inset space ~
18620 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18630 height_special "totalheight"
18635 backgroundcolor "none"
18638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18647 \begin_layout Itemize
18649 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18659 height_special "totalheight"
18664 backgroundcolor "none"
18667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 \begin_inset space ~
18677 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18681 – sont très utiles.
18684 \begin_layout Itemize
18689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18698 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18702 \begin_layout Standard
18703 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18704 \begin_inset space ~
18707 – in contrast to an overfull line
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18711 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18716 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18720 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18721 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18722 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18727 \begin_layout Enumerate
18728 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18729 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18730 or \SpecialChar TeX
18736 \begin_layout Itemize
18738 \begin_inset space ~
18741 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18742 \begin_inset space ~
18745 – sont très utiles.
18749 \begin_layout Enumerate
18750 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18751 \begin_inset Newline newline
18756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18757 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18759 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18761 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18763 \begin_inset space ~
18769 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18771 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18773 \begin_inset space ~
18784 \begin_layout Itemize
18785 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18786 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18787 should be followed by
18788 a line break opportunity.
18791 \begin_layout Standard
18792 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18799 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18810 \begin_layout Enumerate
18811 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18812 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18813 or en dashes (see section
18814 \begin_inset space ~
18818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18820 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18831 Changes and backwards compatibility
18834 \begin_layout Standard
18835 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18837 \begin_inset space ~
18840 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18841 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18850 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18851 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18859 \begin_layout Standard
18860 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18862 \begin_inset space ~
18865 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18867 prevents ligation to dashes.
18869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18876 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18881 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18882 after the input (unless the current text font is
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18891 The behavior was changed since
18892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18907 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18908 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18909 as non-breakable dashes.
18910 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18918 \begin_layout Standard
18921 \begin_inset space ~
18929 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18931 \begin_inset space ~
18934 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18939 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18940 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18942 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18946 If you used both literal and
18947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18954 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18956 \begin_inset space ~
18959 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18960 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18963 \begin_layout Subsection
18965 \begin_inset Index idx
18968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18977 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18984 \begin_layout Standard
18985 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18986 but automatically in the output.
18987 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18993 \begin_inset Index idx
18996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 following the rules of the document language.
19005 does not hyphenate text in the
19009 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19012 \begin_layout Standard
19014 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19018 font and with unusual constructs, like
19019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19027 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19028 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19029 This is done with the menu
19031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19032 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19034 \begin_inset space ~
19040 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19042 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19046 \begin_layout Standard
19047 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19048 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19059 would then see the hyphen
19060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19067 as a line break possibility.
19068 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19069 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19073 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19076 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19078 Prevent Hyphenation
19083 \begin_inset space ~
19091 \begin_layout Subsection
19093 \begin_inset Index idx
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19106 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19109 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19116 \begin_layout Standard
19117 When \SpecialChar LyX
19118 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19119 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19121 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19127 appropriate amount of space.
19128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19131 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19133 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19134 gets after another word.
19137 \begin_layout Standard
19138 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19139 not work in all cases.
19141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19152 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19153 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19156 \begin_layout Standard
19157 Here are some examples of
19161 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19164 \begin_layout Itemize
19169 \begin_layout Itemize
19174 \begin_layout Standard
19175 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19178 \begin_layout Itemize
19180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19184 this is too much space!
19187 \begin_layout Itemize
19192 \begin_layout Standard
19193 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19196 \begin_layout Standard
19197 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19200 \begin_layout Enumerate
19204 \begin_inset space ~
19209 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19216 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19221 \begin_inset Index idx
19224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19225 Spaces ! inter-word
19233 \begin_layout Enumerate
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19242 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19243 \begin_inset space ~
19247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19249 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19254 \begin_inset Index idx
19257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 \begin_layout Enumerate
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19274 \begin_inset space ~
19278 \begin_inset space ~
19285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19292 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19293 This function is also bound to
19296 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19302 \begin_layout Standard
19303 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19306 \begin_layout Itemize
19308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19312 \begin_inset space \space{}
19315 this is too much space!
19318 \begin_layout Itemize
19319 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19323 \begin_layout Standard
19324 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19325 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19327 will take care of this.
19330 \begin_layout Standard
19331 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19335 \begin_inset space ~
19341 feature described in the section
19343 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19348 Additional Features
19353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19355 \begin_inset Index idx
19358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 Typography ! Quotation marks
19365 \begin_inset Index idx
19368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19369 Quotation marks | see
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19399 \begin_layout Standard
19401 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19402 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19403 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19413 The keyboard character,
19417 , generates this automatically.
19420 \begin_layout Standard
19421 You can specify what character the
19425 key produces by using the submenu
19431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19435 \begin_inset Index idx
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 Document ! Settings
19444 dialog and switching the
19448 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19449 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19451 \begin_inset space ~
19457 \begin_layout Labeling
19458 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19470 \begin_inset space ~
19474 \begin_inset space ~
19478 \begin_inset Quotes els
19482 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19496 \begin_inset Quotes els
19500 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19503 quotation marks (as common, e.
19504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19510 \begin_layout Labeling
19511 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19514 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19518 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19522 \begin_inset space ~
19526 \begin_inset space ~
19530 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19534 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19540 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19544 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19548 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19552 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19555 quotation marks (as common, e.
19556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19562 \begin_layout Labeling
19563 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19566 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19570 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19574 \begin_inset space ~
19578 \begin_inset space ~
19582 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19586 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19592 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19596 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19600 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19604 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19607 quotation marks (as common, e.
19608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19614 \begin_layout Labeling
19615 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19618 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19622 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19626 \begin_inset space ~
19630 \begin_inset space ~
19634 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19638 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19644 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19648 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19652 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19656 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19659 quotation marks (as common, e.
19660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19666 \begin_layout Labeling
19667 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19670 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19674 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19678 \begin_inset space ~
19682 \begin_inset space ~
19686 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19690 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19696 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19700 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19704 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19708 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19711 quotation marks (as common, e.
19712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19715 g., in Switzerland)
19718 \begin_layout Labeling
19719 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19722 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19726 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19730 \begin_inset space ~
19734 \begin_inset space ~
19738 \begin_inset Quotes als
19742 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19748 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19752 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19756 \begin_inset Quotes als
19760 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19763 quotation marks (as common, e.
19764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19770 \begin_layout Labeling
19771 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19774 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19778 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19782 \begin_inset space ~
19786 \begin_inset space ~
19790 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19794 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19800 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19804 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19808 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19812 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19815 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19818 \begin_layout Labeling
19819 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19822 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19826 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19830 \begin_inset space ~
19834 \begin_inset space ~
19838 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19842 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19848 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19852 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19856 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19860 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19863 quotation marks (as common, e.
19864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19867 g., in Great Britain)
19870 \begin_layout Labeling
19871 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19874 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19878 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19882 \begin_inset space ~
19886 \begin_inset space ~
19890 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19894 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19900 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19904 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19908 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19912 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19915 quotation marks (as common, e.
19916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19922 \begin_layout Labeling
19923 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19926 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19930 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19934 \begin_inset space ~
19938 \begin_inset space ~
19942 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19946 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19952 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19956 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19960 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19964 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19967 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19973 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19974 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19975 the inner marks differ).
19983 \begin_layout Labeling
19984 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19987 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19991 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19995 \begin_inset space ~
19999 \begin_inset space ~
20003 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20007 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20013 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20017 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20021 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20025 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20028 quotation marks (as common, e.
20029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20035 \begin_layout Labeling
20036 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20039 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20043 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20047 \begin_inset space ~
20051 \begin_inset space ~
20055 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20059 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20065 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20069 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20073 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20077 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20080 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20083 \begin_layout Labeling
20084 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20085 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20093 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20099 \begin_inset space ~
20103 \begin_inset space ~
20109 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20117 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20121 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20125 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20129 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20133 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20136 quotation marks (as common, e.
20137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20146 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20149 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20155 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20156 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20164 \begin_layout Labeling
20165 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20166 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20174 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20180 \begin_inset space ~
20184 \begin_inset space ~
20190 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20198 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20202 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20206 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20210 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20214 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20217 quotation marks (as common, e.
20218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20221 g., in North Korea and China)
20222 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20224 \begin_inset script superscript
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20228 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20231 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20246 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20253 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20263 \begin_layout Standard
20264 Inner quotation marks
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20270 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20271 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20279 does not necessarily mean
20280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20288 This is why we call them
20289 \begin_inset Quotes els
20293 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20309 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20311 \begin_inset Quotes els
20315 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20318 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20321 arg "quote-insert inner"
20326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20332 \begin_layout Standard
20333 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20334 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20335 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20336 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20337 If you check the setting
20339 Use dynamic quotation marks
20343 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20344 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20347 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20348 they appear in a special color).
20349 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20350 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20355 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20358 \begin_layout Standard
20359 Individual quotation marks (i.
20360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20363 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20364 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20368 \begin_layout Subsection
20370 \begin_inset Index idx
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 Typography ! Ligatures
20380 \begin_inset Index idx
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20414 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20421 \begin_layout Standard
20422 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20423 print them as single characters.
20424 These groups are known as
20429 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20430 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20432 Here are the standard ligatures:
20435 \begin_layout Itemize
20439 \begin_layout Itemize
20443 \begin_layout Itemize
20447 \begin_layout Itemize
20451 \begin_layout Itemize
20455 \begin_layout Standard
20456 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20459 \begin_layout Standard
20460 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20461 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20469 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20485 To break a ligature, use
20487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20488 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20490 \begin_inset space ~
20497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20508 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20525 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20533 \begin_layout Subsection
20535 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20537 \begin_inset Index idx
20540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 \begin_layout Standard
20553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20554 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20558 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20561 \begin_layout Description
20563 The name of the game.
20566 \begin_layout Description
20568 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20572 \begin_layout Description
20574 The \SpecialChar TeX
20575 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20579 \begin_layout Description
20580 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20581 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20585 \begin_layout Standard
20586 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20592 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20600 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20601 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20602 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20603 converges to the number
20604 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20607 : The actual version is
20608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20616 , the previous one was
20617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20628 \begin_layout Subsection
20630 \begin_inset Index idx
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 \begin_layout Standard
20643 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20644 space between two words.
20645 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20655 for units use the menu
20657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20658 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20660 \begin_inset space ~
20668 arg "space-insert thin"
20674 \begin_layout Standard
20675 Here is an example to show the differences:
20678 \begin_layout Standard
20679 \begin_inset Tabular
20680 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20681 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20682 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20683 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 \begin_inset space ~
20694 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 space between number and unit
20713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20722 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 half space between number and unit
20747 \begin_layout Subsection
20749 \begin_inset Index idx
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20761 \begin_layout Standard
20762 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20764 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20765 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20766 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20767 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20768 These bits of text became known as
20779 \begin_layout Standard
20780 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20781 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20782 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20783 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20784 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20785 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20786 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20787 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20788 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20789 \begin_inset Newline newline
20797 \begin_inset Newline newline
20805 \begin_inset Newline newline
20808 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20809 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20810 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20812 \begin_inset space ~
20816 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20818 key "latexcompanion"
20824 \begin_inset space ~
20828 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20835 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20836 's page break mechanism.
20839 \begin_layout Chapter
20840 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20843 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20850 \begin_layout Standard
20851 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20854 \begin_inset space ~
20860 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20863 \begin_layout Section
20865 \begin_inset Index idx
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20884 \begin_layout Standard
20886 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20889 \begin_layout Description
20892 \begin_inset space ~
20895 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20896 \begin_inset Newline newline
20900 \begin_inset Note Note
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20912 \begin_layout Description
20913 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20914 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20915 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20918 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20919 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20921 \begin_inset space ~
20927 \begin_inset Newline newline
20931 \begin_inset Note Comment
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20944 \begin_layout Description
20946 \begin_inset space ~
20949 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20950 set in the document settings under
20952 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20954 \begin_inset space ~
20960 \begin_inset Newline newline
20964 \begin_inset Newline newline
20968 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20978 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20983 of a comment that appears in the output.
20989 \begin_inset Newline newline
20993 \begin_inset Newline newline
20996 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20999 \begin_layout Standard
21000 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21012 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21015 \begin_layout Section
21017 \begin_inset Index idx
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21029 name "sec:Footnotes"
21036 \begin_layout Standard
21038 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21044 or the toolbar button
21047 arg "footnote-insert"
21059 \begin_inset Graphics
21060 filename clipart/footnote.png
21069 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21070 's representation of your footnote.
21080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21099 label, the box will
21103 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21104 Clicking on the box label again will close
21117 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21118 and click on the footnote
21133 \begin_layout Standard
21134 Here is an example footnote:
21142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21151 \begin_layout Standard
21152 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21153 position where the footnote box is placed.
21154 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21155 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21156 according to the document class.
21158 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21159 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21165 ey are described in the
21168 \begin_inset space ~
21176 \begin_layout Section
21178 \begin_inset Index idx
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21190 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21197 \begin_layout Standard
21198 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21200 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21204 \begin_inset space ~
21209 or the toolbar button
21212 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21238 appearing within your text.
21239 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21240 's representation of your margin
21249 \begin_layout Standard
21250 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21254 \begin_inset Marginal
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 This is a marginal note.
21267 \begin_layout Standard
21268 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21269 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21270 pages, right on odd pages.
21273 \begin_layout Standard
21274 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21277 \begin_inset space ~
21285 \begin_inset space ~
21293 \begin_layout Section
21294 Graphics and Images
21295 \begin_inset Index idx
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 \begin_inset Index idx
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21317 name "sec:Graphics"
21324 \begin_layout Standard
21325 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21326 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21329 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21338 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21341 \begin_layout Standard
21342 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21347 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21348 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21350 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21351 \begin_inset space ~
21355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21357 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21364 \begin_layout Standard
21369 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21370 of the image in the output.
21371 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21375 \begin_inset space ~
21379 \begin_inset space ~
21388 \begin_inset space ~
21392 \begin_inset space ~
21396 \begin_inset space ~
21401 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21402 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21410 \begin_layout Standard
21414 \begin_inset space ~
21418 \begin_inset space ~
21423 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21424 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21426 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21431 \begin_inset space ~
21436 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21437 with the image size is printed.
21440 \begin_layout Standard
21441 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21442 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21444 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21447 \begin_layout Standard
21449 \begin_inset Graphics
21450 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21458 \begin_layout Standard
21459 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21460 the image into a float, see section
21461 \begin_inset space ~
21465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21467 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21474 \begin_layout Subsection
21476 \begin_inset Index idx
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21488 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21495 \begin_layout Standard
21496 You can insert images in any known file format.
21497 But as we explained in section
21498 \begin_inset space ~
21502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21504 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21508 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21510 therefore uses the program
21514 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21515 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21516 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21517 \begin_inset space ~
21521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21523 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21530 \begin_layout Standard
21531 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21534 \begin_layout Description
21536 \begin_inset space ~
21539 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21540 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21541 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21545 Graphics Interchange Format
21546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21549 (GIF, file extension
21550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21562 \begin_inset Index idx
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21597 Portable Network Graphics
21598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21601 (PNG, file extension
21602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21614 \begin_inset Index idx
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21649 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21653 (JPG, file extension
21654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21678 \begin_inset Index idx
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 \begin_layout Description
21714 \begin_inset space ~
21717 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21719 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21720 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21721 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21722 \begin_inset Newline newline
21725 Scalable image formats can be
21726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21729 Scalable Vector Graphics
21730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21733 (SVG, file extension
21734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21746 \begin_inset Index idx
21749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21781 Encapsulated PostScript
21782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21785 (EPS, file extension
21786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21798 \begin_inset Index idx
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21833 Portable Document Format
21834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21837 (PDF, file extension
21838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21850 \begin_inset Index idx
21853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21868 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21869 result will not be scalable.
21870 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21884 \begin_layout Standard
21885 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21892 \begin_layout Subsection
21893 Grouping of Image Settings
21894 \begin_inset Index idx
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 Images ! Settings grouping
21906 \begin_layout Standard
21907 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21909 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21910 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21912 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21913 need to manually change each of them.
21916 \begin_layout Standard
21917 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21920 \begin_inset space ~
21924 \begin_inset space ~
21936 \begin_inset space ~
21940 \begin_inset space ~
21946 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21947 and checking the name of the desired group.
21950 \begin_layout Section
21952 \begin_inset Index idx
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21971 \begin_layout Standard
21972 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21975 arg "tabular-insert"
21980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21984 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21985 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21986 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21989 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21990 from the rest of the table.
21991 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21992 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21994 Here is an example table:
21997 \begin_layout Standard
21999 \begin_inset Tabular
22000 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22001 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22002 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22003 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22004 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22005 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22203 \begin_layout Standard
22205 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22206 This corresponds to the
22207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22214 table style listed in the style selection.
22217 \begin_layout Standard
22219 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22220 Other available styles include:
22223 \begin_layout Itemize
22225 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22234 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22238 \begin_layout Itemize
22240 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22241 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22244 \begin_layout Itemize
22246 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22255 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22256 bold top/bottom lines (see
22267 \begin_layout Standard
22269 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22270 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22271 button can be changed in
22273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22274 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22278 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22282 \begin_layout Subsection
22286 \begin_layout Standard
22287 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22290 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22294 This brings up the table dialog.
22295 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22296 cursor is placed currently.
22297 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22298 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22299 done on all of your selection.
22302 \begin_layout Standard
22303 In addition to the table dialog, the
22306 \begin_inset space ~
22311 helps you in setting table properties.
22312 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22315 \begin_layout Standard
22319 \begin_inset space ~
22324 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22325 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22326 current cell respectively.
22327 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22329 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22330 of text, see section
22331 \begin_inset space ~
22335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22337 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22344 \begin_layout Standard
22345 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22346 using the check box
22355 This will merge the cells to
22359 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22360 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22361 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22362 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22363 in the last row without the upper border:
22366 \begin_layout Standard
22368 \begin_inset Tabular
22369 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22370 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22371 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22372 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22373 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22394 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 \begin_layout Standard
22506 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22507 -arguments for the table.
22508 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22509 explained in the chapter
22516 \begin_inset space ~
22522 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22523 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22524 but are visible in the output.
22527 \begin_layout Standard
22528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 Most DVI-viewers are
22540 able to display rotations.
22548 \begin_layout Standard
22553 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22558 adds lines for all cell borders.
22561 \begin_layout Subsection
22563 \begin_inset Index idx
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22567 Tables ! Multi-page
22573 \begin_inset Index idx
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 \begin_layout Standard
22586 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22589 \begin_inset space ~
22593 \begin_inset space ~
22601 \begin_inset space ~
22606 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22607 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22610 \begin_layout Description
22615 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22616 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22617 Except for the first page, if
22620 \begin_inset space ~
22628 \begin_layout Description
22632 \begin_inset space ~
22637 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22638 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22641 \begin_layout Description
22646 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22647 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22648 except for the last page, if
22651 \begin_inset space ~
22659 \begin_layout Description
22663 \begin_inset space ~
22668 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22669 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22672 \begin_layout Description
22673 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22674 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22680 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22683 \begin_inset space ~
22691 \begin_layout Standard
22692 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22693 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22694 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22700 In this context, first means first in this order:
22703 \begin_inset space ~
22715 \begin_inset space ~
22720 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22723 \begin_layout Standard
22725 \begin_inset Tabular
22726 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22727 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22728 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22729 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22730 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22731 <row endfirsthead="true">
22732 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22743 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <row endfirsthead="true">
22763 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22783 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22795 <row endhead="true">
22796 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22826 <row endhead="true">
22827 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 <row endfoot="true">
22860 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22911 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24346 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24377 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24532 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24563 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24594 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24749 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24841 <row endlastfoot="true">
24842 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24853 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24862 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24879 \begin_layout Subsection
24881 \begin_inset Index idx
24884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24893 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24900 \begin_layout Standard
24901 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24902 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24903 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24904 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24908 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24911 \begin_layout Standard
24912 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24913 for the column in the table dialog.
24914 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24915 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24919 \begin_layout Standard
24921 \begin_inset Tabular
24922 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24923 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24924 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24925 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24926 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24946 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25015 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25071 This is longer now.
25076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25127 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25128 This is longer now.
25133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25159 \begin_layout Standard
25160 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25161 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25166 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25167 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25172 Selection with the mouse or with
25176 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25177 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25178 the selection from outside the table.
25181 \begin_layout Section
25183 \begin_inset Index idx
25186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25202 \begin_layout Subsection
25206 \begin_layout Standard
25207 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25208 have a fixed location.
25210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25217 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25225 \begin_inset space ~
25230 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25231 too many notes on the current page.
25234 \begin_layout Standard
25235 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25236 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25237 and pages without text.
25238 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25239 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25240 Floats are therefore numbered.
25241 Referencing is described in section
25242 \begin_inset space ~
25246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25248 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25255 \begin_layout Standard
25256 To insert a float, use the menu
25258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25262 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25263 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25265 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25266 \begin_inset Index idx
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25275 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25276 paragraph within the float.
25277 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25278 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25279 left-clicking on the box label.
25280 A closed float box looks like this:
25281 \begin_inset Graphics
25282 filename clipart/float.png
25287 – a gray button with a red label.
25290 \begin_layout Standard
25291 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25293 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25296 \begin_layout Subsection
25298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25300 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25305 \begin_inset Index idx
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25309 Floats ! Figure floats
25317 \begin_layout Standard
25319 \begin_inset space ~
25323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25325 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25329 was created using the menu
25331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25332 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25338 arg "float-insert figure"
25342 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25351 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25355 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25356 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25358 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25360 \begin_inset space ~
25368 arg "layout-paragraph"
25374 \begin_layout Standard
25375 \begin_inset Float figure
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 \begin_inset Graphics
25385 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25395 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25400 name "fig:A-star-in"
25417 \begin_layout Standard
25418 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25419 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25430 ) and refer to it using the menu
25432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25438 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25442 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25443 vague references like
25444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25451 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25452 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25462 For more about cross-references, see section
25463 \begin_inset space ~
25467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25469 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25476 \begin_layout Standard
25477 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25478 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25479 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25480 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25481 as described in section
25482 \begin_inset space ~
25486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25488 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25494 \begin_inset space ~
25498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25500 reference "fig:Two-images"
25504 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25505 You can also set the images one below the other.
25507 \begin_inset space ~
25511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25513 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25520 reference "fig:Star"
25524 are the subfigures.
25527 \begin_layout Standard
25528 \begin_inset Float figure
25535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25540 \begin_inset Float figure
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25548 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25553 name "fig:Undefinable"
25565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25566 \begin_inset Graphics
25567 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25579 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25583 \begin_inset Float figure
25590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25609 \begin_inset Graphics
25610 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25629 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25634 name "fig:Two-images"
25651 \begin_layout Subsection
25653 \begin_inset Index idx
25656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25657 Floats ! Table floats
25665 \begin_layout Standard
25666 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25669 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25672 or the toolbar button
25675 arg "float-insert table"
25679 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25680 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25681 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25683 \begin_inset space ~
25687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25689 reference "tab:Table-float"
25696 \begin_layout Standard
25697 \begin_inset Float table
25704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25710 name "tab:Table-float"
25722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25724 \begin_inset Tabular
25725 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25726 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25727 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25728 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25729 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25856 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25877 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25880 \end{array}\right]$
25888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25922 \begin_layout Subsection
25924 \begin_inset Index idx
25927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25936 \begin_layout Standard
25938 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25939 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25940 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25942 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25950 \begin_inset space ~
25958 \begin_layout Section
25960 \begin_inset Index idx
25963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25972 \begin_layout Standard
25974 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25976 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25977 \begin_inset space \space{}
25983 \begin_layout Standard
25984 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25985 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25991 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25992 and its alignment within the page.
25995 \begin_layout Standard
25997 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26007 height_special "totalheight"
26012 backgroundcolor "none"
26015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26018 This is a minipage.
26019 The text is set in an italic style.
26022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26026 another formatting.
26034 \begin_layout Standard
26035 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26038 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26042 as described in section
26043 \begin_inset space ~
26047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26049 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26054 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26060 \begin_layout Standard
26061 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26071 height_special "totalheight"
26076 backgroundcolor "none"
26079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26080 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26081 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26087 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26091 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26101 height_special "totalheight"
26106 backgroundcolor "none"
26109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26110 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26111 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26119 \begin_layout Standard
26120 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26126 \begin_layout Standard
26127 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26129 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26136 \begin_inset space ~
26144 \begin_layout Chapter
26145 Mathematical Formulas
26146 \begin_inset Index idx
26149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26156 \begin_inset Index idx
26159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26190 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26197 \begin_layout Standard
26198 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26203 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26206 \begin_layout Section
26208 \begin_inset Index idx
26211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26220 \begin_layout Standard
26221 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26234 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26236 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26237 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26238 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26246 \begin_layout Standard
26247 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26256 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26259 \begin_layout Standard
26260 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26261 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26264 \begin_layout Standard
26265 This is a line with an inline formula
26266 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26272 \begin_layout Standard
26273 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26274 paragraph, like this one:
26275 \begin_inset Formula
26282 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26285 \begin_layout Standard
26287 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26289 For example, typing
26290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26303 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26304 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26308 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26311 \begin_inset space ~
26319 \begin_layout Subsection
26320 Navigating in Formulas
26321 \begin_inset Index idx
26324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26333 \begin_layout Standard
26334 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26335 achieved with the arrow keys.
26337 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26338 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26343 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26344 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26348 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26352 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26355 \end{array}\right]$
26363 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26368 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26369 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26372 \begin_layout Standard
26377 , printed in this document as
26378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26382 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26389 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26390 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26391 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26396 For example, if you want
26397 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26405 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26415 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26419 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26424 , since in the latter case only the
26427 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26432 will be under the square root sign:
26433 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26439 \begin_layout Standard
26440 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26442 \begin_inset Formula
26444 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26453 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26454 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26457 \begin_layout Subsection
26461 \begin_layout Standard
26462 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26463 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26467 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26468 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26469 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26470 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26471 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26475 \begin_layout Subsection
26476 Exponents and Subscripts
26477 \begin_inset Index idx
26480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 \begin_inset Index idx
26490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26499 \begin_layout Standard
26500 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26503 arg "math-superscript"
26509 arg "math-subscript"
26512 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26514 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26517 , type in a formula
26520 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26530 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26536 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26540 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26546 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26552 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26561 , you have to use an extra
26565 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26566 For example, if you want
26567 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26573 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26579 Subscripts are similar: To get
26580 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26586 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26594 \begin_layout Subsection
26596 \begin_inset Index idx
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26608 \begin_layout Standard
26609 Create a fraction either with the command
26615 or by using the icon
26618 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26624 \begin_inset space ~
26630 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26631 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26632 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26637 To move back up, press
26642 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26643 \begin_inset Formula
26645 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26648 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26656 \begin_layout Subsection
26658 \begin_inset Index idx
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26670 \begin_layout Standard
26671 Roots can be created using the
26674 \begin_inset space ~
26682 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26688 arg "math-insert \\root"
26710 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26716 always produces a square root.
26719 \begin_layout Subsection
26720 Operators with Limits
26721 \begin_inset Index idx
26724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 \begin_inset Index idx
26734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26743 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26750 \begin_layout Standard
26752 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26756 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26759 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26760 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26761 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26762 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26763 The sum operator will automatically place its
26764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26771 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26773 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26777 \begin_inset Formula
26779 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26784 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26788 \begin_layout Standard
26789 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26791 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26792 behind the operator and using the menu
26794 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26795 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26797 \begin_inset space ~
26801 \begin_inset space ~
26815 \begin_layout Standard
26816 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26825 \begin_inset Index idx
26828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26835 \begin_inset Formula
26837 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26842 which will place the
26843 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26855 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26856 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26862 \begin_layout Standard
26863 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26870 Have a look at section
26871 \begin_inset space ~
26875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26877 reference "subsec:Functions"
26881 for an explanation of function macros.
26884 \begin_layout Subsection
26886 \begin_inset Index idx
26889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26898 \begin_layout Standard
26899 Most math symbols can be found in the
26902 \begin_inset space ~
26907 under one of several categories; including
26924 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26928 \begin_layout Standard
26929 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26930 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26931 don't have to use the
26934 \begin_inset space ~
26939 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26941 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26944 \begin_layout Subsection
26946 \begin_inset Index idx
26949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26958 \begin_layout Standard
26959 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26965 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26971 \begin_inset space ~
26979 arg "math-insert \\space"
26983 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26984 For example, the sequence
26989 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26992 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26994 \begin_inset Graphics
26995 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27000 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27001 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27002 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27003 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27004 , because they are negative
27006 Here are two examples:
27009 \begin_layout Standard
27019 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27035 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27041 \begin_layout Subsection
27043 \begin_inset Index idx
27046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27055 name "subsec:Functions"
27062 \begin_layout Standard
27066 \begin_inset space ~
27071 contains under the button
27074 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27077 a number of function macros, such as
27078 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27082 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27090 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27097 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27098 avoid confusions, because
27099 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27103 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27109 \begin_layout Standard
27110 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27112 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27116 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27122 \begin_layout Standard
27123 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27124 are placed, as described in section
27125 \begin_inset space ~
27129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27131 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27138 \begin_layout Subsection
27140 \begin_inset Index idx
27143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27152 \begin_layout Standard
27153 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27155 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27156 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27157 commands, for example, to enter
27158 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27161 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27162 Our example is entered by typing
27167 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27174 \begin_inset space ~
27178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27180 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27184 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27187 \begin_layout Standard
27188 \begin_inset Float table
27195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27196 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27201 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27205 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27215 \begin_inset Tabular
27216 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27217 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27218 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27219 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27220 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27304 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27358 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27466 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27520 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27574 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27628 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27682 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27736 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27781 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27802 \begin_layout Standard
27803 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27806 \begin_inset space ~
27814 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27817 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27821 \begin_layout Section
27822 Brackets and Delimiters
27823 \begin_inset Index idx
27826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27833 \begin_inset Index idx
27836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27845 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27852 \begin_layout Standard
27853 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27855 For some purposes, using just the keys
27860 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27861 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27862 toolbar delimiter icon
27865 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27869 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27870 \begin_inset Formula
27872 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27880 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27881 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27885 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27888 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27894 \begin_inset Formula
27896 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27904 \begin_layout Standard
27905 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27906 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27910 \begin_layout Standard
27911 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27912 left side and right side.
27913 If you use the option
27916 \begin_inset space ~
27921 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27922 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27924 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27929 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27930 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27933 \begin_layout Standard
27934 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27935 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27936 is to go inside the brackets.
27937 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27942 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27943 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27944 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27948 arg "math-delim ( )"
27954 \begin_layout Section
27955 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27956 \begin_inset Index idx
27959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27966 \begin_inset Index idx
27969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 \begin_inset Index idx
27979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27988 \begin_layout Standard
27989 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27993 \begin_inset space ~
28001 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28005 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28006 Here is an example:
28007 \begin_inset Formula
28009 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28018 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28019 \begin_inset space ~
28023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28025 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28030 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28031 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28032 This alignment is set in the box
28037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28086 for every column as default.
28087 For example, the sequence
28088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28099 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28100 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28101 corresponds to the relevant column.
28102 The result will look like this:
28103 \begin_inset Formula
28106 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28107 column & has & has\,right\\
28108 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28118 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28121 arg "newline-insert newline"
28124 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28125 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28127 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28130 or the math toolbar.
28133 \begin_layout Standard
28134 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28135 It can be created with the menu
28137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28138 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28140 \begin_inset space ~
28152 Here is an example:
28153 \begin_inset Formula
28167 \begin_layout Standard
28168 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28171 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28174 arg "newline-insert newline"
28178 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28183 arg "newline-insert newline"
28186 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28194 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28195 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28196 A new row is created by every further entry of
28199 arg "newline-insert newline"
28203 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28204 Here is an example:
28205 \begin_inset Formula
28207 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28208 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28213 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28214 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28215 \begin_inset Formula
28217 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28226 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28233 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28234 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28237 reference "eq:asquared"
28242 The other types are described in section
28243 \begin_inset space ~
28247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28249 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28256 \begin_layout Section
28257 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28258 \begin_inset Index idx
28261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28262 Math ! Formula numbering
28268 \begin_inset Index idx
28271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 Math ! Referencing formulas
28278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28280 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28288 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28290 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28291 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28293 \begin_inset space ~
28297 \begin_inset space ~
28305 arg "math-number-toggle"
28309 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28310 within parentheses.
28311 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28312 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28313 the document class.
28314 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28315 separated by a dot:
28316 \begin_inset Formula
28326 arg "math-number-toggle"
28329 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28330 You can only number displayed formulas.
28333 \begin_layout Standard
28334 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28336 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28337 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28339 \begin_inset space ~
28343 \begin_inset space ~
28351 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28354 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28355 \begin_inset Formula
28358 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28364 To number all lines use the shortcut
28367 arg "math-number-toggle"
28373 \begin_layout Standard
28374 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28377 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28378 A label is inserted with the menu
28380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28389 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28390 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28391 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28403 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28404 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28405 We inserted in the following example the label
28406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28413 in the second line:
28414 \begin_inset Formula
28416 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28417 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28422 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28423 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28424 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28428 \begin_inset space ~
28436 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28440 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28441 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28442 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28443 as the formula number:
28446 \begin_layout Standard
28447 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28450 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28457 \begin_layout Standard
28458 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28459 's cross-reference box are described in section
28460 \begin_inset space ~
28464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28466 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28471 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28479 \begin_layout Section
28480 User defined math macros
28481 \begin_inset Index idx
28484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28495 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28496 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28497 Math macros are explained in section
28500 \begin_inset space ~
28512 \begin_layout Section
28516 \begin_layout Subsection
28518 \begin_inset Index idx
28521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28530 \begin_layout Standard
28531 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28532 To set a font in a formula, use the
28535 \begin_inset space ~
28543 arg "math-insert \\font"
28546 , or enter its command, listed in table
28547 \begin_inset space ~
28551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28553 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28560 \begin_layout Standard
28561 \begin_inset Float table
28568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28569 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28574 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28578 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28588 \begin_inset Tabular
28589 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28590 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28591 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28624 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28651 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28678 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28711 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28738 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28760 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28766 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28767 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28780 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28796 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28830 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28852 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28858 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28866 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28879 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28895 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28929 \begin_layout Standard
28930 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28938 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28941 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28943 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28947 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28966 \begin_layout Standard
28967 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28968 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28973 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28974 space when you need a space in the box.
28975 Here is an example where
28976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28987 denotes the set of numbers:
28988 \begin_inset Formula
28990 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28998 \begin_layout Standard
28999 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29000 You can, for example, put a character in
29009 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29013 \begin_inset Newline newline
29016 So it is better not to use this feature.
29019 \begin_layout Standard
29020 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29021 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29025 \begin_inset Newline newline
29028 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29034 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29035 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29041 \begin_layout Standard
29048 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29051 \begin_layout Standard
29052 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29054 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29055 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29057 \begin_inset space ~
29065 \begin_layout Subsection
29067 \begin_inset Index idx
29070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29079 \begin_layout Standard
29080 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29082 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29086 \begin_inset space ~
29090 \begin_inset space ~
29098 \begin_inset space ~
29106 arg "math-insert \\font"
29110 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29111 in black instead of blue.
29112 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29113 Here is an example:
29114 \begin_inset Formula
29117 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29118 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29127 \begin_layout Subsection
29129 \begin_inset Index idx
29132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29141 \begin_layout Standard
29142 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29143 automatically chosen in most situations.
29161 For most characters,
29169 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29170 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29175 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29176 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29177 thinks are appropriate.
29178 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29181 arg "math-insert \\style"
29185 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29186 For example, you can set
29187 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29190 , which is normally in
29199 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29203 The four styles are used in the following example:
29206 \begin_layout Standard
29207 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29211 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29215 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29219 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29225 \begin_layout Standard
29226 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29227 is set in a particular size with the menu
29229 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29231 \begin_inset space ~
29236 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29237 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29238 will be adjusted to correspond.
29239 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29250 \begin_layout Standard
29254 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29260 \begin_layout Section
29261 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29263 \begin_inset Index idx
29266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29273 \begin_inset Index idx
29276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29285 \begin_layout Standard
29287 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29288 that are in common use.
29291 \begin_layout Subsection
29292 Enabling AMS-Support
29295 \begin_layout Standard
29296 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29298 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29314 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29315 selecting the checkbox
29318 \begin_inset space ~
29322 \begin_inset space ~
29326 \begin_inset space ~
29335 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29339 \begin_inset Index idx
29342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29343 Document ! Settings
29351 \begin_inset space ~
29357 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29358 -errors in formulas,
29359 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29362 \begin_layout Subsection
29364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29366 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29371 \begin_inset Index idx
29374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29375 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29383 \begin_layout Standard
29384 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29385 provides a selection of different formula types.
29387 allows you to choose between
29408 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29409 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29416 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29419 \begin_layout Chapter
29423 \begin_layout Section
29425 \begin_inset Index idx
29428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29437 name "sec:Cross-References"
29444 \begin_layout Standard
29445 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29446 's strengths is cross-references.
29447 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29449 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29450 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29451 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29454 \begin_layout Enumerate
29458 \begin_layout Enumerate
29459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29461 name "enu:Second-item"
29468 \begin_layout Enumerate
29472 \begin_layout Standard
29473 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29478 or by pressing the toolbar button
29485 A gray label box like this:
29486 \begin_inset Graphics
29487 filename clipart/label.png
29491 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29493 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29528 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29529 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29545 \begin_layout Standard
29546 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29551 or the toolbar button
29554 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29558 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29559 \begin_inset Graphics
29560 filename clipart/reference.png
29564 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29566 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29579 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29583 \begin_layout Standard
29584 As an alternative to
29586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29589 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29594 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29595 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29597 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29609 \begin_layout Standard
29610 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29611 \begin_inset space ~
29615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29617 reference "enu:Second-item"
29624 \begin_layout Standard
29625 It is recommended to use a protected space
29629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29630 described in section
29631 \begin_inset space ~
29635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29637 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29646 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29647 line breaks between them.
29650 \begin_layout Standard
29651 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29654 \begin_layout Description
29655 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29658 reference "fig:Two-images"
29665 \begin_layout Description
29666 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29667 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29679 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29686 \begin_layout Description
29687 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29688 \begin_inset space ~
29692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29693 LatexCommand pageref
29694 reference "fig:Two-images"
29701 \begin_layout Description
29703 \begin_inset space ~
29707 \begin_inset space ~
29710 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29712 LatexCommand vpageref
29713 reference "fig:Two-images"
29718 \begin_inset Newline newline
29721 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29722 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29723 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29724 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29725 it prints “on the next page”.
29726 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29729 \begin_layout Description
29731 \begin_inset space ~
29735 \begin_inset space ~
29739 \begin_inset space ~
29742 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29745 reference "fig:Two-images"
29750 \begin_inset Newline newline
29753 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29759 ; otherwise it behaves like
29763 \begin_inset space ~
29767 \begin_inset space ~
29776 \begin_layout Description
29778 \begin_inset space ~
29781 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29782 \begin_inset Newline newline
29786 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29794 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29804 \begin_inset Index idx
29807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29809 packages ! prettyref
29815 \begin_inset Index idx
29818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29820 packages ! refstyle
29831 \begin_inset Newline newline
29834 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29835 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29838 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29843 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29851 is the default and preferred because
29855 supports only English documents.
29856 The format is specified by using the command
29860 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29869 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29870 preamble of the document.
29871 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29889 \begin_inset Newline newline
29896 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29901 \begin_inset Newline newline
29912 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29913 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29915 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29916 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29921 , you might do so as follows:
29922 \begin_inset Newline newline
29929 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29930 format{prop}{Proposition
29935 \begin_inset Newline newline
29938 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29939 the package documentation
29940 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29942 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29948 \begin_inset Newline newline
29959 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29966 \begin_layout Description
29968 \begin_inset space ~
29971 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29973 LatexCommand nameref
29974 reference "fig:Two-images"
29981 \begin_layout Description
29983 \begin_inset space ~
29986 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29987 label for the reference:
29988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29989 LatexCommand labelonly
29990 reference "fig:Two-images"
29995 \begin_inset Newline newline
29998 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29999 Code, if you want to issue a command
30000 that \SpecialChar LyX
30006 , then you may want to use the
30009 \begin_inset space ~
30014 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30024 This is the form needed for e.
30025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30029 \begin_inset space \space{}
30036 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30037 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30039 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30043 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30047 \begin_layout Standard
30048 You can only use the style
30052 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30056 is always possible.
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30060 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30061 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30063 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30064 \begin_inset space ~
30068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30070 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30077 \begin_layout Standard
30078 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30082 \begin_inset space ~
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30091 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30092 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30093 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30096 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30099 \begin_inset space ~
30104 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30105 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30108 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30112 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30113 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30114 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30120 \begin_layout Standard
30121 You can change labels at any time.
30122 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30124 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30126 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30127 change them all manually
30132 \begin_layout Standard
30133 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30135 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30140 References are described in detail in the section
30151 \begin_layout Section
30152 Table of Contents and other Listings
30153 \begin_inset Index idx
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30163 \begin_inset Index idx
30166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30167 Navigating ! Outline
30173 \begin_inset Index idx
30176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30192 \begin_layout Subsection
30194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30196 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30207 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30209 \begin_inset space ~
30213 \begin_inset space ~
30219 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30221 If you click on it, the
30225 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30226 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30227 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30229 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30231 \begin_inset space ~
30236 that is described in section
30237 \begin_inset space ~
30241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30243 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30250 \begin_layout Standard
30251 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30252 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30254 \begin_inset space ~
30258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30260 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30264 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30266 \begin_inset space ~
30270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30272 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30276 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30278 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30281 \begin_layout Subsection
30282 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30285 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30292 \begin_layout Standard
30293 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30295 You can insert them via the
30297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30298 List/Contents/References
30301 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30304 \begin_layout Section
30305 URLs and Hyperlinks
30306 \begin_inset Index idx
30309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30316 \begin_inset Index idx
30319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30328 \begin_layout Subsection
30330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30339 \begin_layout Standard
30340 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30348 \begin_layout Standard
30349 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30351 \begin_inset Flex URL
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30356 https://www.lyx.org
30364 \begin_layout Standard
30365 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30371 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30375 \begin_layout Standard
30376 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30384 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30393 \begin_layout Subsection
30395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30397 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30404 \begin_layout Standard
30405 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30410 or with the toolbar button
30417 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30426 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30427 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30428 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30430 name "LyX's homepage"
30431 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30436 , an Email address like this:
30437 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30439 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30440 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30446 , or a link to a file.
30451 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30460 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30473 to the link target.
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30477 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30478 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30479 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30480 the text style dialog.
30481 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30485 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30487 name "LyX's homepage"
30488 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30497 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30501 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30508 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30510 \begin_inset Newline newline
30518 \begin_inset Newline newline
30525 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30526 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30530 \begin_layout Section
30532 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30534 \begin_inset Index idx
30537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30546 name "sec:Counters"
30553 \begin_layout Standard
30555 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
30556 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30557 is its ability to manage counters.
30558 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30559 modify counters directly.
30560 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30562 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
30566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30568 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
30569 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
30570 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
30571 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
30572 to set the section counter to four.
30579 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
30580 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30581 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30582 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30587 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30588 There are five commands you can use:
30591 \begin_layout Enumerate
30593 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30594 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30597 \begin_layout Enumerate
30599 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30600 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30601 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30604 \begin_layout Enumerate
30606 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30607 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30610 \begin_layout Enumerate
30612 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30613 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30617 \begin_layout Enumerate
30619 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30620 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30623 \begin_layout Standard
30625 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30626 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30627 those that are available in the current document class.
30632 \begin_layout Section
30634 \begin_inset Index idx
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30646 name "sec:Appendices"
30653 \begin_layout Standard
30654 Appendices are created with the menu
30656 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30658 \begin_inset space ~
30662 \begin_inset space ~
30668 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30669 as the appendix part of the book.
30670 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30673 \begin_layout Standard
30674 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30675 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30676 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30677 and the subsection number.
30678 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30682 \begin_layout Standard
30684 \begin_inset space ~
30688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30690 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30698 \begin_inset space ~
30702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30704 reference "subsec:Export"
30711 \begin_layout Section
30713 \begin_inset Index idx
30716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30725 name "sec:Bibliography"
30732 \begin_layout Standard
30733 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30735 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30736 \begin_inset space ~
30740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30742 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30749 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30754 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30755 \begin_inset space ~
30759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30761 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30766 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30767 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30768 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30772 using a bibliography database.
30775 \begin_layout Standard
30776 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30777 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30781 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30782 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30783 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30784 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30785 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30788 \begin_layout Subsection
30789 The Bibliography Environment
30790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30792 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30799 \begin_layout Standard
30804 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30806 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30815 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30817 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30818 of ASCII characters only.
30822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30824 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30827 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30833 \begin_inset Newline newline
30837 \begin_inset Flex URL
30840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30842 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30852 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30862 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30863 \begin_inset Newline newline
30870 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30871 the number of the entry.
30876 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30885 \begin_layout Standard
30886 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30891 or the toolbar button
30894 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30898 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30899 containing the available citations.
30900 Select one or more keys from the list and
30910 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30911 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30917 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30918 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30930 \begin_layout Standard
30934 Companion Second Edition
30937 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30939 key "latexcompanion"
30947 \begin_layout Standard
30948 The \SpecialChar LyX
30949 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30950 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30960 \begin_layout Standard
30961 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30968 \begin_inset Index idx
30971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30980 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30981 the label needs to be given the form
30982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30993 Author A and Author B(Year)
30994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31001 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31008 \begin_inset space ~
31013 in the document settings
31014 \begin_inset Index idx
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31018 Document ! Settings
31025 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31027 \begin_inset space ~
31033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31035 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31043 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31045 Once you have done that, the
31049 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31066 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31067 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31068 These two are madatory.
31069 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31072 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31074 ) and in abrreviated form (
31081 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31082 add the abbreviated form to
31086 and the full list to the optional
31094 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31095 If specified like this,
31097 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31098 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31108 is specified, toggling
31109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31116 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31117 full and abbreviated list
31121 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31122 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31123 the citation references.
31124 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31129 \begin_layout Standard
31130 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31133 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31135 \begin_inset space ~
31143 arg "layout-paragraph"
31147 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31150 \begin_layout Subsection
31151 Bibliography databases
31152 \begin_inset Index idx
31155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31156 Bibliography ! Databases
31162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31164 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31171 \begin_layout Standard
31172 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31180 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31181 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31186 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31188 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31189 your working field in a database.
31190 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31191 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31192 list for that document.
31193 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31197 \begin_layout Standard
31198 The database is a text file with the file extension
31199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31210 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31211 The format is explained in
31212 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31219 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31221 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31223 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31229 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31230 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31231 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31233 \begin_inset Flex URL
31236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31238 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31246 \begin_layout Standard
31248 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31249 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31250 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31252 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31254 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31255 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31256 Those are addressed by
31261 \begin_inset Index idx
31264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31266 packages ! biblatex
31272 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31273 (although it has been significantly
31274 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31284 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31285 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31286 might conversely fail to correctly
31287 handle databases that use specific
31296 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31300 \begin_layout Standard
31301 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31306 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31312 \begin_inset Index idx
31315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31316 Document ! Settings
31328 \begin_inset space ~
31333 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31342 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31344 \begin_inset Index idx
31347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31348 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31358 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31362 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31364 \begin_inset space ~
31370 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31371 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31379 Add bibliography to TOC
31381 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31386 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31387 in the document or just the cited references.
31389 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31394 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31395 differ from the encoding of the document.
31400 \begin_layout Standard
31401 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31402 style file is a text file with the file extension
31403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31414 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31415 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31416 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31417 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31419 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31425 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31426 \begin_inset Newline newline
31430 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31432 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31442 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31447 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31451 \begin_layout Standard
31452 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31457 \begin_inset Index idx
31460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31461 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31467 \begin_inset Index idx
31470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31472 packages ! biblatex
31480 \begin_layout Standard
31481 Accessing a database via
31485 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31489 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31491 \begin_inset space ~
31497 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31498 you cannot select a
31503 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31507 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31510 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31511 As for the styles, note the following.
31516 \begin_layout Standard
31521 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31534 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31535 file (text file with the file extension
31536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31547 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31548 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31550 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31554 \begin_layout Standard
31559 styles are not set in the
31562 \begin_inset space ~
31567 dialog, but in the document settings.
31568 \begin_inset Index idx
31571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31572 Document ! Settings
31577 However, in the dialog in the
31581 field, which is only visible if you use
31585 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31586 example how its heading will appear).
31587 These options are described in detail in the
31592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31602 \begin_layout Standard
31603 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31604 \begin_inset space ~
31608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31610 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31621 Bibliography Processors
31624 \begin_layout Standard
31625 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31626 uses a bibliography processor,
31627 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31628 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31629 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31631 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31632 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31635 \begin_layout Standard
31636 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31638 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31639 You can do this on a general level in
31641 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31642 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31643 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31646 or for individual documents in
31648 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31649 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31653 The following variants are available by default:
31656 \begin_layout Description
31657 biber a specific, modern processor
31658 \begin_inset Index idx
31661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31668 developed exclusively for
31672 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31678 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31683 makes use of; if you use the
31687 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31694 \begin_layout Description
31695 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31696 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31697 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31701 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31704 \begin_layout Description
31705 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31706 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31710 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31714 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31718 features are supported.
31721 \begin_layout Standard
31722 By default (with the
31728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31729 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31742 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31743 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31744 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31747 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31748 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31761 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31762 -based bibliography styles).
31763 This should suit most needs.
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31767 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31768 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31769 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31774 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31775 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31776 You can adjust it in
31778 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31779 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31780 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31787 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31788 can add below the selection.
31789 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31790 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31810 \begin_layout Standard
31812 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31814 These are explained in detail in section
31816 Customizing Bibliographies
31820 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31825 Additional Features
31828 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31832 \begin_layout Subsection
31834 \begin_inset Index idx
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31838 Bibliography ! Citation format
31844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31846 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31853 \begin_layout Standard
31854 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31859 \begin_inset space \space{}
31862 numerical citation (as
31863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31870 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31878 ) or author-year citations (as
31879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31888 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31893 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31897 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31901 \begin_inset Index idx
31904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31905 Document ! Settings
31910 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31916 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31917 labels, is there to use
31920 \begin_inset space ~
31931 \begin_inset space ~
31936 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31939 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31946 \begin_layout Standard
31947 With a bibliography database (see
31948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31950 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31957 ) one has in contrary to the
31961 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31962 These style formats are available:
31965 \begin_layout Description
31967 \begin_inset space ~
31970 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31971 -based approached without any additional packages
31972 (simple numeric citations).
31975 \begin_layout Description
31976 Biblatex loads the package
31981 \begin_inset Index idx
31984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31986 packages ! biblatex
31991 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31993 Biblatex citation style
31997 Biblatex bibliography style
32000 Options to the package
32004 can be entered in the
32011 \begin_layout Description
32013 \begin_inset space ~
32017 \begin_inset space ~
32020 mode) loads the package
32024 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32025 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32037 behavior very closely.
32042 this option has some additional styles.
32047 styles are also supported by this variant.
32050 \begin_layout Description
32052 \begin_inset space ~
32055 (BibTeX) loads the package
32060 \begin_inset Index idx
32063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32070 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32073 \begin_layout Description
32075 \begin_inset space ~
32078 (BibTeX) loads the package
32083 \begin_inset Index idx
32086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32093 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32096 \begin_layout Standard
32105 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32107 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32116 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32118 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32119 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32121 Biblatex citation style
32124 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32130 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32134 \begin_layout Standard
32135 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32136 are available in the
32141 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32142 a name prefix such as
32143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32158 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32163 \begin_inset space \space{}
32167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32178 \begin_layout Standard
32179 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32185 \begin_inset space \space{}
32188 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32194 \begin_inset space \space{}
32198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32210 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32214 \begin_inset space ~
32222 \begin_inset space ~
32228 Here is a simple example where the text
32229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32233 \begin_inset space ~
32237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32240 appears after the reference:
32243 \begin_layout Quote
32245 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32248 key "latexcompanion"
32256 \begin_layout Standard
32257 All styles except for
32261 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32271 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32275 \begin_layout Standard
32276 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32277 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32278 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32283 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32284 multi-citation (so-called
32285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32288 qualified citation lists
32289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32295 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32300 dialog will display three columns in the field
32307 \begin_inset space ~
32315 \begin_inset space ~
32323 \begin_inset space ~
32329 If you double-click on an item's
32332 \begin_inset space ~
32340 \begin_inset space ~
32345 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32348 General text before
32354 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32357 \begin_layout Subsection
32359 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32362 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32366 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32370 \begin_layout Standard
32372 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32374 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32377 \begin_inset space ~
32381 \begin_inset space ~
32385 \begin_inset space ~
32389 \begin_inset space ~
32392 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32395 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32398 \begin_layout Itemize
32400 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32401 If citation entries include any of the fields
32402 \begin_inset Flex Code
32405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32407 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32416 \begin_inset Flex Code
32419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32421 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32429 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32430 \begin_inset Flex Code
32433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32435 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32443 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32444 \begin_inset Flex Code
32447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32449 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32457 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32460 \begin_layout Itemize
32462 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32463 If citation entries include any of the fields
32464 \begin_inset Flex Code
32467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32469 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32477 (filled by JabRef) or
32478 \begin_inset Flex Code
32481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32483 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32491 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32492 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32493 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32496 \begin_layout Standard
32498 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32499 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32500 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32503 Search drive for cited files
32507 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32508 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32509 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32510 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32514 It uses the tokens supplied at
32518 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32519 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32520 arbitrary position).
32522 opens the first matching file it finds.
32523 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32524 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32525 the chance this works for you.
32530 \begin_layout Standard
32532 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32533 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32534 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32536 \begin_inset Flex Code
32539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32541 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32550 \begin_inset Flex Code
32553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32555 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32563 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32567 Cite format description
32574 \begin_layout Section
32576 \begin_inset Index idx
32579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32596 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32600 \begin_inset space ~
32605 or the toolbar button
32612 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32613 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32614 by \SpecialChar LyX
32615 as the index entry.
32618 \begin_layout Standard
32619 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32622 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32624 \begin_inset space ~
32630 A light blue box labeled
32631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32642 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32643 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32647 \begin_layout Standard
32648 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32649 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32650 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32651 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32653 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32655 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32663 \begin_layout Subsection
32664 Grouping Index Entries
32665 \begin_inset Index idx
32668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32678 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32680 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32681 lists under the entry
32682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32690 First we create the entry
32691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32699 \begin_inset space ~
32703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32705 reference "subsec:Lists"
32710 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32711 \begin_inset space ~
32715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32717 reference "sec:Itemize"
32721 , we insert the command
32724 \begin_layout Standard
32730 \begin_layout Standard
32734 \begin_layout Standard
32740 \begin_layout Standard
32741 for the enumerated list in section
32742 \begin_inset space ~
32746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32748 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32755 \begin_layout Standard
32756 The exclamation mark
32757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32764 marks the grouping levels.
32765 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32766 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32767 If we don't have an index entry for
32768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32775 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32778 \begin_layout Subsection
32780 \begin_inset Index idx
32783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32784 Index ! Page ranges
32792 \begin_layout Standard
32793 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32795 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32796 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32797 an index entry in section
32798 \begin_inset space ~
32802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32804 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32811 \begin_layout Standard
32814 Paragraph environments|(
32817 \begin_layout Standard
32818 and another entry at the end of section
32819 \begin_inset space ~
32823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32825 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32832 \begin_layout Standard
32835 Paragraph environments|)
32838 \begin_layout Standard
32840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32863 respectively start and end the index range.
32864 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32865 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32866 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32867 An example is the index entry
32868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32871 Document ! Settings
32872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32878 \begin_layout Subsection
32880 \begin_inset Index idx
32883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32884 Index ! Cross referencing
32892 \begin_layout Standard
32893 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32894 We referred for example in the index entry
32895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32903 \begin_inset space ~
32907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32909 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32913 ) to the index entry
32914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32921 in the same section using the entry
32924 \begin_layout Standard
32927 GIF|see{Image formats}
32930 \begin_layout Standard
32931 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32933 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32934 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32937 \begin_layout Subsection
32939 \begin_inset Index idx
32942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32943 Index ! Entry order
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32952 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32953 follow the rules for the index order.
32954 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32960 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32962 \begin_inset space ~
32966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32968 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32977 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32978 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33003 \begin_inset Index idx
33006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33007 Dummy entries ! maïs
33013 \begin_inset Index idx
33016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 Dummy entries ! maître
33023 \begin_inset Index idx
33026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33027 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33032 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33033 maïs, maison, maître.
33034 To achieve this, we use the command
33037 \begin_layout Standard
33040 previous entry@current entry
33043 \begin_layout Standard
33044 In our case we want to have
33045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33060 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33063 \begin_layout Standard
33069 \begin_layout Standard
33070 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33071 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33073 See the next subsection for an example.
33076 \begin_layout Subsection
33078 \begin_inset Index idx
33081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33082 Index ! Entry layout
33090 \begin_layout Standard
33091 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33092 \begin_inset Index idx
33095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33098 This is an italic dummy entry
33103 You can also format the page number using the character
33104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33111 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33112 -command without a backslash.
33113 We can write for example
33116 \begin_layout Standard
33119 italic page number:|textit
33122 \begin_layout Standard
33123 to get the page number in italic.
33124 \begin_inset Index idx
33127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33128 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33133 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33134 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33152 \begin_inset space ~
33158 Have a look at section
33159 \begin_inset space ~
33163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33165 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33169 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33173 \begin_layout Standard
33174 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33182 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33186 to generate the index, see section
33187 \begin_inset space ~
33191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33193 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33202 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33207 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33208 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33211 key "latexcompanion"
33224 \begin_layout Standard
33225 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33227 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33228 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33229 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33230 If so, put the following in the preamble
33233 \begin_layout Standard
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33249 \begin_layout Standard
33255 \begin_layout Standard
33256 in the index entry.
33257 \begin_inset Index idx
33260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33261 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33266 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33267 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33268 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33271 \begin_layout Standard
33272 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33273 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33274 a bold font for all index entries.
33275 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33287 documentation for details,
33288 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33290 key "makeindex,xindy"
33298 \begin_layout Subsection
33300 \begin_inset Index idx
33303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33312 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33319 \begin_layout Standard
33320 If the index generation program
33324 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33325 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33329 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33330 distribution, is used.
33334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33339 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33340 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33341 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33342 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33343 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33353 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33355 dialog, see section
33356 \begin_inset space ~
33360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33362 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33367 The available options are listed and explained in
33368 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33370 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33376 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33380 \begin_layout Standard
33381 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33382 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33386 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33390 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33391 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33394 \begin_layout Subsection
33398 \begin_layout Standard
33399 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33400 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33408 next to the standard index.
33410 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33411 that add this feature.
33418 \begin_inset Index idx
33421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 packages ! splitidx
33428 package to generate multiple indexes.
33429 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33435 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33437 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33445 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33446 style, but it also includes
33447 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33448 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33456 \begin_layout Standard
33457 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33458 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33460 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33461 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33464 and select the option
33466 Use multiple Indexes
33473 already contains the standard index
33474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33482 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33483 also appear as a heading) to the
33487 input field and press the
33492 The new index now also appears in the list.
33493 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33494 label color to the new index.
33497 \begin_layout Standard
33498 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33502 List/Contents/References
33508 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33509 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33510 are additional features:
33513 \begin_layout Itemize
33514 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33515 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33518 \begin_layout Itemize
33519 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33520 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33525 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33526 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33527 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33528 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33531 \begin_layout Itemize
33536 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33537 code in the name of the index.
33540 \begin_layout Section
33541 Nomenclature/Glossary
33542 \begin_inset Index idx
33545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33552 \begin_inset Index idx
33555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33586 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33595 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33596 called nomenclature or glossary.
33599 \begin_layout Standard
33600 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33607 \begin_inset Index idx
33610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33627 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33631 \begin_layout Standard
33632 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33633 and then use the menu
33635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33641 \begin_inset space ~
33646 or the toolbar button
33649 arg "nomencl-insert"
33654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33665 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33668 \begin_layout Standard
33669 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33670 The first is the term or
33674 that you wish to define.
33679 of the term or symbol.
33682 \begin_layout Standard
33683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33691 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33692 code for nomenclature entries the option
33696 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33704 \begin_layout Subsection
33705 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33706 \begin_inset Index idx
33709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33710 Nomenclature ! Layout
33718 \begin_layout Standard
33719 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33723 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33730 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33738 \begin_inset Newline newline
33746 \begin_inset Newline newline
33752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33759 character starts/ends the formula.
33760 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33761 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33773 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33783 \begin_layout Standard
33784 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33785 syntax is given in section
33786 \begin_inset space ~
33790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33792 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33799 \begin_layout Standard
33803 \begin_inset space ~
33808 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33810 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33815 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33822 in this document is:
33823 \begin_inset Newline newline
33828 dummy entry for the character
33833 \begin_inset Newline newline
33845 \begin_inset space ~
33855 font use the command
33884 \begin_layout Standard
33885 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33890 \begin_inset space \space{}
33894 \begin_inset Newline newline
33910 \begin_inset Newline newline
33913 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33914 This command will make the font of all symbols
33921 \begin_inset space ~
33929 \begin_layout Standard
33930 If the characters |
33931 \begin_inset space \space{}
33935 \begin_inset space \space{}
33939 \begin_inset space \space{}
33943 \begin_inset space \space{}
33947 \begin_inset space \space{}
33950 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33951 code they need to be escaped
33952 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33953 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33954 LatexCommand nomenclature
33955 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33956 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33964 \begin_layout Subsection
33965 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33966 \begin_inset Index idx
33969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33970 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33978 \begin_layout Standard
33979 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33980 -code of the symbol
33982 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33984 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33987 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33988 LatexCommand nomenclature
33990 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33998 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34002 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34003 LatexCommand nomenclature
34006 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34012 They will be sorted by
34013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34039 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34042 will be sorted before the
34046 since the character
34047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34054 is considered in sorting.
34057 \begin_layout Standard
34058 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34061 \begin_inset space ~
34066 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34067 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34069 For the example given, you can insert
34073 in this field for the
34074 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34081 will be located before
34082 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34088 \begin_layout Standard
34089 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34094 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34104 \begin_layout Subsection
34105 Nomenclature Options
34106 \begin_inset Index idx
34109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34110 Nomenclature ! Options
34116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34118 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34125 \begin_layout Standard
34130 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34131 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34134 \begin_layout Description
34135 refeq Appends the phrase
34136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34151 to every nomenclature entry, where
34157 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34160 \begin_layout Description
34161 refpage Appends the phrase
34162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34177 to every nomenclature entry, where
34183 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34186 \begin_layout Description
34187 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34190 \begin_layout Standard
34191 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34192 class options list in the
34194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34198 In this document the options
34205 \begin_layout Standard
34206 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34213 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34214 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34219 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34222 \begin_layout Description
34232 \begin_layout Description
34235 nomrefpage Like the
34242 \begin_layout Description
34245 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34254 \begin_layout Description
34258 \begin_inset space ~
34264 \begin_inset space ~
34269 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34281 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34282 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34295 \begin_inset Newline newline
34301 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34305 \begin_inset space ~
34317 unskip, see equation
34320 \begin_inset Newline newline
34327 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34328 \begin_inset Newline newline
34334 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34338 \begin_inset space ~
34355 \begin_layout Standard
34356 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34359 \begin_inset space ~
34364 in the document settings under
34367 \begin_inset space ~
34375 \begin_layout Standard
34383 \begin_inset Newline newline
34387 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34391 \begin_inset space ~
34403 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34405 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34406 \begin_inset Newline newline
34413 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34414 \begin_inset Newline newline
34418 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34422 \begin_inset space ~
34434 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34439 \begin_layout Subsection
34440 Printing the Nomenclature
34441 \begin_inset Index idx
34444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34445 Nomenclature ! Printing
34453 \begin_layout Standard
34454 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34457 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34473 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34474 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34475 You can choose between these settings:
34478 \begin_layout Description
34479 Default a space of 1
34480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34486 \begin_layout Description
34488 \begin_inset space ~
34492 \begin_inset space ~
34495 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34498 \begin_layout Description
34499 Custom custom space
34502 \begin_layout Standard
34503 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34512 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34520 For example, in order to change the name to
34524 , add the following line to the preamble:
34527 \begin_layout Standard
34540 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34543 \begin_layout Standard
34544 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34545 \begin_inset Newline newline
34560 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34563 \begin_layout Subsection
34564 Nomenclature Program
34565 \begin_inset Index idx
34568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34569 Nomenclature ! Program
34575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34577 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34590 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34591 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34593 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34598 by adding options, see section
34599 \begin_inset space ~
34603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34605 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34610 The available options are listed and explained in
34611 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34613 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34621 \begin_layout Section
34623 \begin_inset Index idx
34626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 \begin_inset Index idx
34636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34637 Document ! Branches
34643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34645 name "sec:Branches"
34652 \begin_layout Standard
34653 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34654 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34655 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34656 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34661 allows you to put text into branches.
34662 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34663 To create a branch, either select the menu
34665 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34666 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34669 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34671 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34678 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34679 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34680 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34681 and whether the name of the branch should
34682 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34683 (see below for an example).
34684 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34685 to the name of the other) and to add
34686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34698 \begin_inset space ~
34701 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34702 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34705 \begin_layout Standard
34706 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34707 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34712 where you can choose a branch.
34713 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34717 \begin_layout Standard
34718 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34719 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34722 \begin_layout Standard
34723 \begin_inset Branch Question
34727 \begin_layout Standard
34732 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34740 \begin_layout Standard
34741 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34745 \begin_layout Standard
34750 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34758 \begin_layout Standard
34765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34766 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34769 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34770 Consider for example a file
34771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34778 which has the above branches.
34780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34787 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34811 branch were inactive,
34812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34827 branch was active, likewise
34828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34843 branch was active, and
34844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34847 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34851 if both branches were active.
34852 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34853 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34859 \begin_layout Standard
34860 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34866 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34867 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34871 \begin_inset space ~
34879 \begin_layout Standard
34880 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34884 \begin_layout Standard
34890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34897 branch is deactivated.
34903 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34909 \begin_layout Standard
34910 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34911 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34912 definitions for each branch.
34913 For example you can define for the question branch
34917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34918 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34919 -syntax, see section
34920 \begin_inset space ~
34924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34926 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34938 \begin_layout Standard
34948 \begin_layout Standard
34958 \begin_layout Standard
34959 and for the answer branch
34962 \begin_layout Standard
34972 \begin_layout Standard
34982 \begin_layout Standard
34983 \begin_inset Branch Question
34987 \begin_layout Standard
34991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35019 \begin_layout Standard
35020 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35024 \begin_layout Standard
35028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35056 \begin_layout Standard
35057 Now it is possible to use the
35061 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35068 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35071 commands to obtain conditional output.
35072 Here is an example formula where only the
35079 \begin_inset Formula
35081 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35089 \begin_layout Standard
35090 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35098 \begin_layout Standard
35099 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35105 \begin_inset space \space{}
35108 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35110 For this advanced usage, see the
35116 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35121 \begin_layout Section
35123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35125 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35130 \begin_inset Index idx
35133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35142 \begin_layout Standard
35145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35146 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35149 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35151 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35157 \begin_inset Index idx
35160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35162 packages ! hyperref
35167 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35168 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35169 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35170 part of the document.
35173 \begin_layout Standard
35174 The header information in the dialog tab
35178 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35179 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35180 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35181 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35185 \begin_inset space ~
35189 \begin_inset space ~
35194 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35195 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35196 and author entries.
35200 \begin_inset space ~
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35213 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35216 \begin_layout Standard
35217 You can specify in the dialog tab
35221 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35226 \begin_inset space ~
35230 \begin_inset space ~
35234 \begin_inset space ~
35239 option allows long links to be split;
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35246 \begin_inset space ~
35250 \begin_inset space ~
35258 \begin_inset space ~
35263 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35266 \begin_inset space ~
35271 colors the different links.
35272 The default colors are:
35275 \begin_layout Labeling
35276 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35281 for hyperlinks and URLs
35284 \begin_layout Labeling
35285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35293 \begin_layout Labeling
35294 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35302 \begin_layout Standard
35303 but you can change these in the field
35308 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35311 \begin_layout Standard
35314 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35317 \begin_layout Standard
35322 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35323 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35324 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35332 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35333 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35334 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35344 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35345 when opening the PDF.
35347 \begin_inset space ~
35350 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35351 \begin_inset space ~
35354 1 will only display the sections.
35357 \begin_layout Standard
35358 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35359 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35365 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35376 \begin_layout Section
35378 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35382 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35389 \begin_layout Subsection
35392 \begin_inset Index idx
35395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35405 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35412 \begin_layout Standard
35413 As \SpecialChar LyX
35414 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35415 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35416 commands and constructs,
35419 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35420 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35421 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35422 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35423 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35424 cannot support all packages and
35428 \begin_layout Standard
35429 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35430 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35431 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35435 Code box is created by the menu
35437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35439 \begin_inset space ~
35444 or by the toolbar button
35457 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35465 \begin_layout Standard
35466 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35468 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35470 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35475 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35480 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35487 , you can write the command part
35493 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35494 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35498 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35499 Code box behind the word.
35500 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35501 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35505 \begin_layout Standard
35506 \begin_inset Graphics
35507 filename clipart/ERT.png
35515 \begin_layout Standard
35519 \begin_layout Standard
35520 This is a line with a
35524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35547 \begin_layout Standard
35548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35556 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35557 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35558 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35559 know that the command is finished.
35567 \begin_layout Subsection
35568 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35570 \begin_inset Argument 1
35573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35574 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35581 \begin_inset Index idx
35584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35594 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35601 \begin_layout Standard
35602 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35603 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35604 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35605 uses in the background.
35606 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35607 is based on commands, you can
35608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35616 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35617 any time if you know the right commands.
35618 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35619 is the end of the day.
35620 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35621 all caption labels bold.
35622 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35624 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35628 \begin_layout Standard
35629 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35631 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35633 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35646 \begin_layout Standard
35647 As result you find that the package
35652 \begin_inset Index idx
35655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35663 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35665 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35668 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35672 \begin_inset space ~
35680 \begin_layout Standard
35685 usepackage[options]{package name}
35688 \begin_layout Standard
35689 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35690 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35691 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35692 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35695 \begin_layout Standard
35696 In your case the package name is
35701 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35706 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35707 So you add the command
35710 \begin_layout Standard
35715 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35718 \begin_layout Standard
35719 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35724 For more commands provided by the
35728 package, have a look at its documentation,
35729 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35744 \begin_layout Standard
35745 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35747 For example if you use a
35751 class, you don't need the package
35755 , you can instead write
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35763 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35768 \begin_layout Standard
35769 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35770 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35771 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35778 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35781 \begin_layout Standard
35782 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35783 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35785 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35786 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35787 Code box as described in the previous
35791 \begin_layout Standard
35792 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35793 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35798 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35806 \begin_layout Standard
35807 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35827 \begin_inset Note Note
35830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35831 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35839 \begin_layout Left Header
35840 \begin_inset Argument 1
35843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35863 \begin_inset Note Note
35866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35867 defines the header line as described below
35875 \begin_layout Center Header
35876 \begin_inset Argument 1
35879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35888 \begin_layout Right Header
35889 \begin_inset Argument 1
35892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35913 \begin_layout Left Footer
35914 \begin_inset Argument 1
35917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35938 \begin_layout Center Footer
35939 \begin_inset Argument 1
35942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35954 \begin_inset Newline newline
35958 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35964 \begin_layout Right Footer
35965 \begin_inset Argument 1
35968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35990 \begin_layout Section
35991 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35994 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35999 \begin_inset Index idx
36002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36003 Document ! Header/Footer line
36009 \begin_inset Index idx
36012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36021 \begin_layout Standard
36022 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36026 \begin_inset space ~
36037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36049 As a second step add in the menu
36051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36052 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36061 Custom Header/Footerlines
36064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36068 This module offers the following 6
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36075 \begin_layout Description
36077 \begin_inset space ~
36081 \begin_inset space ~
36085 \begin_inset space ~
36089 \begin_inset space ~
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36099 \begin_layout Description
36101 \begin_inset space ~
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36123 \begin_layout Standard
36124 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36125 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36128 \begin_layout Standard
36129 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36130 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36138 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36142 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36145 \begin_layout Standard
36146 \begin_inset Float figure
36153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36156 \begin_inset Tabular
36157 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36158 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36159 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36161 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36181 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36210 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36221 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36225 The normal text on the page goes here.
36226 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36228 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36229 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36234 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36243 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36254 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36272 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36301 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36324 name "fig:Page-layout"
36328 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36341 \begin_layout Standard
36342 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36350 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36359 is set to “Default”.
36360 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36369 \begin_layout Subsection
36373 \begin_layout Standard
36374 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36375 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36376 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36377 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36379 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36381 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36384 \begin_layout Standard
36385 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36386 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36392 \begin_inset space ~
36400 \begin_layout Description
36403 thepage prints the current page number
36406 \begin_layout Description
36409 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36412 \begin_layout Description
36415 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36418 \begin_layout Description
36421 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36422 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36429 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36432 because it usually goes in a left header.
36435 \begin_layout Description
36438 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36439 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36441 It is normally used in the right header.
36444 \begin_layout Subsection
36445 Default header/footer
36448 \begin_layout Standard
36449 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36450 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36451 footer has the page number.
36452 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36453 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36454 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36457 \begin_inset space ~
36465 \begin_layout Subsection
36469 \begin_layout Standard
36470 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36471 Some pages are different.
36472 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36473 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36474 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36475 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36476 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36480 Header and footer decoration line
36483 \begin_layout Standard
36484 By default, you get a 0.4
36485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36488 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36489 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36501 in the following way:
36504 \begin_layout Standard
36511 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36514 \begin_layout Standard
36515 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36528 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36535 \begin_layout Standard
36536 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36538 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36539 \begin_inset space ~
36543 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36554 Several header/footer lines
36557 \begin_layout Standard
36558 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36559 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36560 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36562 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36578 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36580 \begin_inset space ~
36588 \begin_layout Standard
36595 headheight}{height}
36598 \begin_layout Standard
36603 is a size in standard units (e.
36604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36608 \begin_inset space \space{}
36616 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36617 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36618 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36619 logfile with the menu
36621 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36623 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_inset space ~
36636 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36641 \begin_inset Index idx
36644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36646 packages ! fancyhdr
36652 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36653 for your header/footer.
36656 \begin_layout Subsection
36660 \begin_layout Standard
36661 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36662 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36663 This example consists of the following definition:
36666 \begin_layout Description
36668 \begin_inset space ~
36677 , empty optional argument
36680 \begin_layout Description
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36685 Header empty, empty optional argument
36688 \begin_layout Description
36690 \begin_inset space ~
36699 in the optional argument
36702 \begin_layout Description
36704 \begin_inset space ~
36713 in the optional argument
36716 \begin_layout Description
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36735 \begin_inset Newline newline
36739 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36746 in the optional argument
36749 \begin_layout Description
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36760 , empty optional argument
36763 \begin_layout Description
36766 headrulewidth set to 2
36767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36773 \begin_layout Standard
36774 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36775 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36791 \begin_layout Standard
36792 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36798 \begin_layout Standard
36802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36806 pagestyle{headings}
36812 \begin_inset Note Note
36815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36816 switches back to page style with the default headings
36824 \begin_layout Section
36825 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36828 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36833 \begin_inset Index idx
36836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36843 \begin_inset Index idx
36846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36857 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36858 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36859 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36862 \begin_layout Subsection
36866 \begin_layout Standard
36867 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36873 \begin_inset Index idx
36876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36878 packages ! preview-latex
36883 (on some systems named simply
36888 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36890 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36897 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36899 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36907 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36908 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36909 -package are automatically
36910 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36914 \begin_layout Subsection
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36920 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36922 activate the option
36925 \begin_inset space ~
36932 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36938 \begin_inset space ~
36942 \begin_inset space ~
36945 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36965 \begin_inset space ~
36970 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36973 \begin_layout Standard
36974 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36987 \begin_inset space ~
36995 \begin_layout Standard
36996 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36997 and when you finish
37001 \begin_layout Standard
37002 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37010 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37011 generated by activating the option
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37020 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37028 \begin_layout Subsection
37029 Selected document parts
37032 \begin_layout Standard
37033 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37034 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37035 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37036 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37038 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37044 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37045 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37046 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37050 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37057 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37069 is explained in section
37071 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37076 \begin_inset space ~
37086 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37087 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37088 the final rotated boxes,
37089 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37090 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37092 Here is the result:
37095 \begin_layout Standard
37096 \begin_inset Preview
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37107 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37113 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37123 height_special "totalheight"
37128 backgroundcolor "none"
37131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37156 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37162 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 Previewing works also for colors.
37186 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37205 is explained in section
37212 \begin_inset space ~
37225 \begin_layout Standard
37226 \begin_inset Preview
37228 \begin_layout Standard
37232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37251 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37256 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37275 \begin_layout Standard
37276 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37282 \begin_layout Standard
37283 If \SpecialChar LyX
37284 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37285 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37286 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37287 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37288 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37289 the \SpecialChar TeX
37291 If \SpecialChar LyX
37292 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37293 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37295 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37296 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37297 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37300 \begin_layout Subsection
37305 \begin_layout Standard
37306 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37307 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37310 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37317 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37319 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37321 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37322 's main window, then only this selection
37323 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37324 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37325 the source view window.
37330 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37331 ; but note that if you have
37332 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37334 not just the one which is open at the time.
37337 \begin_layout Section
37338 Advanced Find and Replace
37339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37341 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37346 \begin_inset Index idx
37349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37356 \begin_inset Index idx
37359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37368 \begin_layout Subsection
37372 \begin_layout Standard
37373 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37374 allows for searching of complex,
37375 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37377 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37378 The key-features are:
37381 \begin_layout Itemize
37382 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37383 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37384 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37388 \begin_layout Itemize
37389 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37390 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37391 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37392 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37395 \begin_layout Itemize
37396 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37397 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37398 outside of mathematics environments
37401 \begin_layout Itemize
37402 Search may be widened to a specific
37407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37414 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37415 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37422 \begin_layout Itemize
37423 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37424 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37429 \begin_inset space ~
37432 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37435 \begin_layout Subsection
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37440 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37455 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37458 ) or the toolbar button
37461 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37467 Advanced Find and Replace
37472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37476 \begin_layout Standard
37482 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37491 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37494 arg "paragraph-break"
37498 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37499 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37503 arg "paragraph-break"
37506 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37510 searches backwards.
37513 \begin_layout Standard
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37522 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37536 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37540 Searching for mathematics
37543 \begin_layout Standard
37544 Mathematical formulas, such as
37545 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37548 or something more complex like
37549 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37552 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37557 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37558 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37559 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37560 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37566 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37570 \begin_layout Standard
37571 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37572 This is done by switching to the
37576 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37581 This way, entering in the
37588 \begin_layout Itemize
37589 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37590 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37593 \begin_layout Itemize
37594 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37595 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37598 \begin_layout Itemize
37599 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37600 of it only within section headings.
37601 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37602 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37606 \begin_layout Itemize
37607 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37608 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37615 \begin_layout Standard
37616 The entries made in the
37620 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37629 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37633 button or alternatively press
37636 arg "paragraph-break"
37643 while the cursor is in the
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37654 \begin_layout Standard
37655 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37657 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37661 \begin_layout Itemize
37662 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37663 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37671 with its typewriter version
37672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37686 \begin_layout Itemize
37687 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37693 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37705 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37712 (you may want to enable the
37715 \begin_inset space ~
37723 \begin_inset space ~
37728 options and disable the
37736 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37744 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37745 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37749 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37752 , or occurrences of
37753 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37757 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37763 \begin_layout Subsection
37767 \begin_layout Standard
37768 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37773 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37775 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37777 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37787 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37793 This is done with the context menu
37795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37796 Insert Regular Expression
37798 while the cursor is in the
37803 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37804 expression matching rules
37808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37809 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37819 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37820 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37826 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37827 same text in the document.
37828 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37829 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37832 \begin_layout Enumerate
37833 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37838 editor the fraction
37839 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37843 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37846 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37847 fractions with the given denominator.
37850 \begin_layout Enumerate
37851 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37863 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37868 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37869 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37870 Also, by inserting a
37871 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37874 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37875 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37879 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37880 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37881 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37884 , and referring back to them through
37885 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37889 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37893 For example, try searching with the regexp
37894 \begin_inset Newline newline
37897 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37900 \begin_inset Newline newline
37903 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37906 \begin_layout Standard
37907 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37910 \begin_layout Standard
37911 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37919 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37920 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37921 sub-expressions is absolute.
37923 \begin_inset space ~
37927 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37930 always refers to the first occurrence of
37931 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37934 in all entered regexps.
37942 \begin_layout Section
37944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37946 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37951 \begin_inset Index idx
37954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37963 \begin_layout Standard
37965 has a built-in spell checker.
37968 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37975 key or the toolbar button
37978 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37981 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37982 beginning of the currently selected text.
37983 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37984 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37985 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37986 scrolled so that it is visible.
37987 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37988 n, if any could be found.
37989 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37993 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37994 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37997 \begin_layout Standard
37998 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38001 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38005 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38006 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38008 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38009 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38012 \begin_inset space ~
38020 arg "dialog-show character"
38023 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38025 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38028 \begin_layout Standard
38029 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38030 can be downloaded from here:
38031 \begin_inset Newline newline
38035 \begin_inset Flex URL
38038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38040 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
38042 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38043 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
38044 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
38052 \begin_inset Newline newline
38056 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
38058 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
38059 You should download
38062 \begin_inset space ~
38065 files for each language
38066 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
38071 link at the end of the opened webpage)
38074 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
38075 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38082 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38083 's installation subfolder
38091 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38093 \begin_inset Newline newline
38096 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38097 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38098 but in most cases these are
38114 is the language code.
38117 \begin_layout Subsection
38121 \begin_layout Standard
38124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38125 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38127 \begin_inset space ~
38130 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38133 you can set the following things:
38136 \begin_layout Description
38138 \begin_inset space ~
38141 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38142 should use for spell checking.
38143 Depending on your platform,
38153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38154 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38155 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38170 \begin_inset space ~
38173 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38176 \begin_layout Description
38178 \begin_inset space ~
38181 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38182 will always use the given language
38183 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38186 \begin_layout Description
38188 \begin_inset space ~
38191 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38197 \begin_inset space \space{}
38201 This should normally not be needed.
38204 \begin_layout Description
38206 \begin_inset space ~
38210 \begin_inset space ~
38213 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38225 \begin_layout Description
38227 \begin_inset space ~
38230 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38231 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38232 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38233 appear in a context menu.
38234 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38238 \begin_layout Description
38240 \begin_inset space ~
38244 \begin_inset space ~
38248 \begin_inset space ~
38251 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38255 \begin_layout Section
38257 \begin_inset Index idx
38260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38269 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38276 \begin_layout Standard
38278 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38279 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38289 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38291 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38301 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38303 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38304 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38305 which are available for many languages.
38308 \begin_layout Standard
38309 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38310 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38314 \begin_layout Subsection
38315 Setting up the thesaurus
38318 \begin_layout Standard
38327 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38331 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38336 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38342 \begin_inset space ~
38350 For instance, the US English files are named:
38353 \begin_layout Itemize
38357 \begin_layout Itemize
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38370 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38371 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38374 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38375 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38376 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38378 \begin_inset space ~
38383 ) to the path where they are installed.
38387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38389 ies, typical locations are
38395 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38399 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38403 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38406 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38412 LibreOffice-<Version>
38419 On the Mac, the default location is
38421 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38422 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38423 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38424 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38425 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38426 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38434 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38435 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38436 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38440 \begin_layout Standard
38441 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38443 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
38445 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
38448 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
38449 \begin_inset Newline newline
38453 \begin_inset Flex URL
38456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38458 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
38460 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38461 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
38462 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
38472 \begin_layout Standard
38473 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38474 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38476 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38477 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38478 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38480 \begin_inset space ~
38485 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38487 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38488 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38492 \begin_layout Standard
38493 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38495 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38498 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38504 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38507 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38508 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38516 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38517 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38518 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38525 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38528 \begin_layout Subsection
38529 Using the thesaurus
38532 \begin_layout Standard
38533 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38535 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38538 or the toolbar button
38541 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38544 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38546 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38548 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38549 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38550 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38559 ), related terms (such as
38562 \begin_inset space ~
38571 ), compounds (such as
38574 \begin_inset space ~
38583 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38592 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38595 \begin_layout Standard
38596 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38597 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38601 \begin_layout Standard
38602 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38603 the dictionary, such as the above
38607 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38612 \begin_inset space \space{}
38615 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38616 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38617 For example, looking up the word form
38621 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38626 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38631 \begin_inset space \space{}
38642 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38643 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38644 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38647 \begin_layout Section
38649 \begin_inset Index idx
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38659 \begin_inset Index idx
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38663 Document ! Change Tracking
38669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38671 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38679 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38680 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38681 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38682 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38684 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38689 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38691 \begin_inset space ~
38699 \begin_layout Standard
38700 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38714 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38715 You can change the color in
38717 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38718 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38720 \begin_inset space ~
38724 \begin_inset space ~
38729 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38735 \begin_inset Index idx
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38739 Color ! Change tracking
38744 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38745 's status bar when the
38746 cursor is in changed text.
38747 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38750 arg "changes-merge"
38756 \begin_layout Standard
38757 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38759 \begin_inset Index idx
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 \begin_layout Standard
38772 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38778 \begin_layout Standard
38779 \begin_inset Graphics
38780 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38788 \begin_layout Standard
38789 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38795 \begin_layout Standard
38796 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38799 \begin_layout Standard
38800 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38806 \begin_layout Standard
38807 \begin_inset Tabular
38808 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38809 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38810 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38811 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38812 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38821 arg "changes-track"
38829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38837 \begin_inset space ~
38840 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38860 arg "changes-output"
38868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38874 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38876 \begin_inset space ~
38879 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38881 \begin_inset space ~
38885 \begin_inset space ~
38889 \begin_inset space ~
38898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38919 Jumps to the next change
38925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 arg "change-accept"
38942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38950 \begin_inset space ~
38953 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38955 \begin_inset space ~
38964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38973 arg "change-reject"
38981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38989 \begin_inset space ~
38992 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38994 \begin_inset space ~
39003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39012 arg "changes-merge"
39020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39026 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39031 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39033 \begin_inset space ~
39042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39051 arg "all-changes-accept"
39059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39067 \begin_inset space ~
39070 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 arg "all-changes-reject"
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39113 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39115 \begin_inset space ~
39119 \begin_inset space ~
39128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39151 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39152 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39154 \begin_inset space ~
39163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39188 \begin_inset space ~
39204 \begin_layout Standard
39205 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39211 \begin_layout Standard
39212 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39232 \begin_layout Standard
39233 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39234 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39235 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39236 the next change after the current cursor position.
39237 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39238 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39239 step to the next change.
39240 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39243 \begin_layout Standard
39244 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39245 to describe a change.
39248 \begin_layout Standard
39250 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39251 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39257 \begin_inset Index idx
39260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39268 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39270 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39277 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39283 \begin_layout Section
39284 Comparison of Documents
39285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39287 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39292 \begin_inset Index idx
39295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 Comparison of documents
39304 \begin_layout Standard
39305 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39308 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39312 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39313 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39315 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39317 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39321 \begin_inset space ~
39325 \begin_inset space ~
39329 \begin_inset space ~
39338 \begin_inset space ~
39342 \begin_inset space ~
39346 \begin_inset space ~
39350 \begin_inset space ~
39354 \begin_inset space ~
39358 \begin_inset space ~
39363 enables the change tracking option
39366 \begin_inset space ~
39370 \begin_inset space ~
39374 \begin_inset space ~
39379 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39382 \begin_layout Section
39383 International Support
39384 \begin_inset Index idx
39387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 International support
39396 \begin_layout Standard
39397 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39398 with any language you want.
39399 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39400 up \SpecialChar LyX
39402 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39404 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39412 \begin_layout Standard
39413 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39414 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39415 \begin_inset space ~
39419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39421 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39428 \begin_layout Subsection
39430 \begin_inset Index idx
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39440 \begin_inset Index idx
39443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39444 Document ! Settings
39450 \begin_inset Index idx
39453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39454 Document ! Language
39462 \begin_layout Standard
39465 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39466 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39469 dialog lets you set
39471 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39476 \begin_layout Standard
39481 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39486 \begin_inset space ~
39491 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39492 For details about the different encoding options see section
39493 \begin_inset space ~
39497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39499 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39506 \begin_layout Subsection
39507 Keyboard mapping configuration
39508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39510 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39517 \begin_layout Standard
39518 If you have for example a U.
39519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39522 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39523 can use an alternate keymap.
39524 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39529 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39530 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39531 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39534 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39541 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39546 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39547 which one you want to use.
39550 \begin_layout Standard
39551 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39552 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39553 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39557 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39558 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39559 one to support the characters you want.
39560 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39567 \begin_layout Chapter
39570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39572 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39579 \begin_layout Standard
39580 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39581 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39582 topic inside the user's guide.
39585 \begin_layout Section
39587 \begin_inset Index idx
39590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39599 \begin_layout Standard
39604 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39607 \begin_layout Subsection
39611 \begin_layout Standard
39612 Creates a new document.
39615 \begin_layout Subsection
39619 \begin_layout Standard
39620 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39621 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39622 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39624 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39625 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39631 \begin_layout Subsection
39635 \begin_layout Standard
39639 \begin_layout Subsection
39643 \begin_layout Standard
39644 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39645 Click there on a file to open it.
39648 \begin_layout Subsection
39650 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39654 \begin_layout Standard
39656 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39657 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39661 \begin_layout Subsection
39665 \begin_layout Standard
39666 Closes the current document.
39669 \begin_layout Subsection
39673 \begin_layout Standard
39674 Closes all opened documents.
39677 \begin_layout Subsection
39681 \begin_layout Standard
39682 Saves the actual document.
39685 \begin_layout Subsection
39689 \begin_layout Standard
39690 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39691 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39695 \begin_layout Subsection
39697 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39701 \begin_layout Standard
39703 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39704 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39710 \begin_layout Subsection
39714 \begin_layout Standard
39715 Saves all opened documents.
39718 \begin_layout Subsection
39722 \begin_layout Standard
39723 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39726 \begin_layout Subsection
39730 \begin_layout Standard
39731 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39732 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39733 It is described in the section
39735 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39740 Additional Features
39745 \begin_layout Subsection
39749 \begin_layout Standard
39750 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39751 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39753 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39754 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39758 \begin_layout Standard
39759 When using the menu entry
39762 \begin_inset space ~
39767 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39771 \begin_inset space ~
39775 \begin_inset space ~
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39784 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39785 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39788 \begin_layout Subsection
39790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39792 name "subsec:Export"
39799 \begin_layout Standard
39800 You can export your document to various file formats.
39801 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39803 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39804 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39805 during its configuration.
39808 \begin_layout Standard
39809 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39811 \begin_inset space ~
39815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39817 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39824 \begin_layout Description
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39833 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39838 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39839 \begin_inset Newline newline
39842 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39843 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39847 \begin_layout Description
39848 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39854 \begin_layout Description
39856 \begin_inset space ~
39859 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39865 \begin_layout Description
39866 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39867 's native DVI-format.
39868 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39869 files paths or file names in your document.
39871 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39878 \begin_layout Description
39879 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39880 in files paths or file names
39883 \begin_layout Description
39885 \begin_inset space ~
39892 ) DVI-format using the program
39894 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39897 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39901 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39909 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39917 \begin_layout Description
39919 \begin_inset space ~
39922 (cropped) the same as
39926 but with cropped page margins.
39929 \begin_layout Description
39931 \begin_inset space ~
39934 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39938 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39943 \begin_layout Description
39947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39955 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39963 \begin_layout Description
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39969 \begin_inset space ~
39972 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39976 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39984 \begin_layout Description
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39997 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39998 source that is compilable with the program
40000 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40004 \begin_layout Description
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40013 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40014 source, additionally all images used in the document
40015 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40019 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40022 \begin_layout Description
40026 \begin_inset space ~
40031 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40032 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40033 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40041 \begin_layout Description
40045 \begin_inset space ~
40054 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40055 source that is compilable with the program
40061 \begin_layout Description
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40074 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40075 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40081 \begin_layout Description
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40086 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40087 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40093 \begin_inset space \space{}
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40117 represent the version number)
40120 \begin_layout Description
40122 \begin_inset space ~
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40129 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40130 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40131 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40135 \begin_layout Description
40136 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40137 's internal XHTML engine
40140 \begin_layout Description
40142 \begin_inset space ~
40146 \begin_inset space ~
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40154 \begin_inset space ~
40157 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40162 For the conversion the program
40171 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40174 \begin_layout Description
40175 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40180 \begin_layout Description
40182 \begin_inset space ~
40185 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40187 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40190 For the conversion the program
40199 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40202 \begin_layout Description
40204 \begin_inset space ~
40207 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40208 For the conversion the program
40217 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40220 \begin_layout Description
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40225 (cropped) the same as
40228 \begin_inset space ~
40233 but with cropped page margins
40236 \begin_layout Description
40240 \begin_inset space ~
40245 PDF-format using the program
40249 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40252 \begin_layout Description
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40273 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40278 \begin_inset space \space{}
40281 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40285 \begin_layout Description
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40294 PDF-format using the program
40296 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40299 , produces PDF-files directly
40302 \begin_layout Description
40306 \begin_inset space ~
40311 PDF-format using the program
40315 , produces PDF-files directly
40318 \begin_layout Description
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40327 PDF-format using the program
40331 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40334 \begin_layout Description
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40343 PDF-format using the program
40348 , produces PDF-files directly
40351 \begin_layout Description
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40363 \begin_layout Description
40367 \begin_inset space ~
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40376 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40377 and then exported as text using the program
40382 \begin_layout Description
40387 PostScript format using the program
40395 options see section
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40402 reference "subsec:General-output"
40409 \begin_layout Description
40410 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40411 source and also code in the statistical programming
40425 it is possible to use
40429 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40433 \begin_layout Standard
40434 If one of the menu entries
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40450 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40452 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40460 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40465 \begin_inset Index idx
40468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40469 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40478 \begin_layout Subsection
40482 \begin_layout Standard
40483 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40484 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40493 reference "sec:Paths"
40498 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40507 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40508 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40509 's preferences as described in section
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40516 reference "subsec:Converters"
40523 \begin_layout Subsection
40524 New and Close Window
40527 \begin_layout Standard
40528 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40532 \begin_layout Subsection
40536 \begin_layout Standard
40537 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40540 \begin_layout Section
40542 \begin_inset Index idx
40545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40554 \begin_layout Subsection
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 Described in section
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40566 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40573 \begin_layout Subsection
40574 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40577 \begin_layout Standard
40578 Described in section
40579 \begin_inset space ~
40583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40585 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40592 \begin_layout Subsection
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40598 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40601 \begin_layout Subsection
40605 \begin_layout Standard
40606 Selects the whole document.
40609 \begin_layout Subsection
40610 Find & Replace (Quick)
40613 \begin_layout Standard
40614 Described in section
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40621 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40628 \begin_layout Subsection
40629 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40632 \begin_layout Standard
40633 Described in section
40634 \begin_inset space ~
40638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40640 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40647 \begin_layout Subsection
40648 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40651 \begin_layout Standard
40652 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40656 \begin_layout Subsection
40658 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40662 \begin_layout Standard
40664 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40665 Described in section
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40672 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40681 \begin_layout Subsection
40683 \begin_inset Index idx
40686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40687 Paragraph ! Settings
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40697 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40702 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40703 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40710 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40718 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40722 \begin_layout Subsection
40724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40728 \begin_layout Standard
40730 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40731 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40736 \begin_layout Enumerate
40738 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40739 Customize text properties by means of the
40745 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40748 ; this is described in section
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40755 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40762 \begin_layout Enumerate
40764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40765 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40767 Apply last settings
40770 \begin_layout Enumerate
40772 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40773 Change the casing of selected text (
40788 \begin_layout Subsection
40790 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40794 \begin_layout Standard
40796 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40797 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40798 text styles (in the case of this document:
40820 \begin_inset space ~
40824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40826 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40835 \begin_layout Subsection
40836 Table and Rows & Columns
40839 \begin_layout Standard
40840 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40841 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40842 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40845 \begin_layout Subsection
40849 \begin_layout Standard
40850 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40851 It will dissolve this inset.
40852 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40856 \begin_layout Subsection
40860 \begin_layout Standard
40861 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40862 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40865 \begin_layout Subsection
40866 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40869 \begin_layout Standard
40870 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40872 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40879 reference "sec:Nesting"
40884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40886 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40893 \begin_layout Section
40895 \begin_inset Index idx
40898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40907 \begin_layout Standard
40908 At the bottom of the
40912 menu the opened documents are listed.
40915 \begin_layout Subsection
40916 Open/Close all Insets
40919 \begin_layout Standard
40920 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40923 \begin_layout Subsection
40924 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40927 \begin_layout Standard
40928 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40931 \begin_layout Standard
40932 Math macros are described in the
40939 \begin_layout Subsection
40943 \begin_layout Standard
40944 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40951 reference "sec:Navigating"
40956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40958 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40965 \begin_layout Subsection
40969 \begin_layout Standard
40970 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40978 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40985 \begin_layout Subsection
40989 \begin_layout Standard
40990 Opens a window showing console messages.
40991 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40996 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40997 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40998 is processing the document.
41001 \begin_layout Subsection
41003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41005 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41010 \begin_inset Index idx
41013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41022 \begin_layout Standard
41023 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41025 All toolbars and the
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41033 can be turned on and off.
41038 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41067 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41071 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
41078 \begin_layout Standard
41083 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
41087 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41088 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41089 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41090 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41091 is inside a formula or table respectively.
41094 \begin_layout Standard
41096 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41103 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41110 \begin_layout Subsection
41114 \begin_layout Standard
41118 \begin_inset space ~
41122 \begin_inset space ~
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41130 \begin_inset space ~
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41143 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41144 's main window vertically while
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41172 will split it horizontally.
41173 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41174 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41175 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41176 three or more documents at the same time.
41177 To close a split view, use the menu
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41184 \begin_inset space ~
41192 \begin_layout Subsection
41196 \begin_layout Standard
41197 Closes a split view.
41200 \begin_layout Subsection
41204 \begin_layout Standard
41205 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41206 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41207 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41208 's main window fullscreen.
41209 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41210 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41213 \begin_layout Section
41215 \begin_inset Index idx
41218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41227 \begin_layout Subsection
41231 \begin_layout Standard
41232 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41239 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41250 \begin_layout Subsection
41252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41254 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41261 \begin_layout Standard
41262 Here you can insert the following characters:
41265 \begin_layout Description
41270 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41273 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41274 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41275 -packages you have installed.
41276 You can get a complete display by checking
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_inset Newline newline
41289 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41297 Not all characters will be visible in the
41301 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41302 dialog (see section
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41309 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41313 ) can display every character.
41321 \begin_layout Description
41322 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41326 \begin_layout Description
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41335 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41342 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41349 \begin_layout Description
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41354 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41358 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41364 \begin_layout Description
41366 \begin_inset space ~
41369 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41373 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41379 \begin_layout Description
41381 \begin_inset space ~
41384 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41388 \begin_layout Description
41390 \begin_inset space ~
41393 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41397 \begin_layout Description
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41403 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41404 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41410 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41415 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41421 \begin_inset space \space{}
41424 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41425 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41434 To insert a fraction use the command
41439 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41443 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41452 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41459 \begin_layout Description
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41464 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41468 \begin_layout Description
41470 \begin_inset space ~
41474 \begin_inset Index idx
41477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41484 \begin_inset Index idx
41487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41488 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41493 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41494 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41496 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41502 \begin_inset Index idx
41505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41513 \begin_inset Newline newline
41516 More information about this feature can be found in the
41522 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41528 \begin_layout Description
41529 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41531 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41532 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41536 \begin_layout Subsection
41540 \begin_layout Standard
41541 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41544 \begin_layout Description
41545 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41546 \begin_inset script superscript
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41557 \begin_layout Description
41558 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41559 \begin_inset script subscript
41561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41570 \begin_layout Description
41572 \begin_inset space ~
41575 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41582 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41589 \begin_layout Description
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41594 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41601 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41608 \begin_layout Description
41610 \begin_inset space ~
41613 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41620 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41627 \begin_layout Description
41629 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41634 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41640 \begin_inset space \space{}
41643 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41644 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41653 To insert a fraction use the command
41658 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41662 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41671 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41680 \begin_layout Description
41682 \begin_inset space ~
41685 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41692 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41699 \begin_layout Description
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41704 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41705 \begin_inset space ~
41709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41711 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41718 \begin_layout Description
41720 \begin_inset space ~
41723 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41730 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41737 \begin_layout Description
41738 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41739 \begin_inset space ~
41743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41745 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41752 \begin_layout Description
41754 \begin_inset space ~
41757 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41758 \begin_inset space ~
41762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41764 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41771 \begin_layout Description
41773 \begin_inset space ~
41776 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41783 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41790 \begin_layout Description
41792 \begin_inset space ~
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41799 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41808 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41815 for a usage example.
41818 \begin_layout Description
41820 \begin_inset space ~
41824 \begin_inset space ~
41827 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41834 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41841 \begin_layout Description
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41846 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41847 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41850 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41851 \begin_inset space ~
41855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41857 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41864 \begin_layout Description
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41869 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41870 \begin_inset space ~
41874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41876 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41883 \begin_layout Description
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41888 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41889 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41891 \begin_inset space ~
41895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41897 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41904 \begin_layout Description
41906 \begin_inset space ~
41909 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41910 \begin_inset space ~
41914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41916 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41923 \begin_layout Description
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41929 \begin_inset space ~
41932 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41933 \begin_inset space ~
41937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41939 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41946 \begin_layout Subsection
41948 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41952 \begin_layout Standard
41954 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41955 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41956 The submenu allows you to insert
41959 \begin_layout Description
41961 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41966 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41969 \begin_layout Description
41971 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41973 \begin_inset space ~
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41980 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41984 \begin_layout Description
41986 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41988 \begin_inset space ~
41991 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41994 \begin_layout Description
41996 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41998 \begin_inset space ~
42001 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
42004 \begin_layout Description
42006 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
42008 \begin_inset space ~
42012 \begin_inset space ~
42015 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
42019 \begin_layout Description
42021 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
42023 \begin_inset space ~
42026 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
42029 \begin_layout Description
42031 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
42033 \begin_inset space ~
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42041 \begin_inset space ~
42044 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
42047 \begin_layout Description
42049 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
42051 \begin_inset space ~
42054 Name inserts the user name as specified in
42056 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42057 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42063 \begin_layout Description
42065 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
42067 \begin_inset space ~
42070 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
42072 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42073 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42079 \begin_layout Description
42081 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
42082 Other\SpecialChar ldots
42083 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
42084 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
42087 \begin_layout Subsection
42090 List/Contents/References
42093 \begin_layout Standard
42094 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42119 are described in section
42120 \begin_inset space ~
42124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42126 reference "sec:toc"
42135 is described in section
42136 \begin_inset space ~
42140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42142 reference "sec:Index"
42150 is described in section
42151 \begin_inset space ~
42155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42157 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42163 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42166 is described in section
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42173 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42180 \begin_layout Subsection
42184 \begin_layout Standard
42185 To insert floats, as described in section
42186 \begin_inset space ~
42190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42192 reference "sec:Floats"
42196 and in detail the chapter
42203 \begin_inset space ~
42211 \begin_layout Subsection
42215 \begin_layout Standard
42216 To insert notes, described in section
42217 \begin_inset space ~
42221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42223 reference "sec:Notes"
42230 \begin_layout Subsection
42234 \begin_layout Standard
42235 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42237 Branches are described in section
42238 \begin_inset space ~
42242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42244 reference "sec:Branches"
42251 \begin_layout Subsection
42255 \begin_layout Standard
42256 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42257 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42259 An example is the document class
42260 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42270 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42279 with three custom insets.
42282 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42286 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42292 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42295 \begin_layout Subsection
42297 \begin_inset Index idx
42300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42309 \begin_layout Standard
42310 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42312 For more information see chapter
42314 External Document Parts
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42323 \begin_layout Subsection
42325 \begin_inset Index idx
42328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42337 \begin_layout Standard
42338 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42339 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42354 \begin_layout Subsection
42358 \begin_layout Standard
42363 dialog as described in section
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42370 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42377 \begin_layout Subsection
42381 \begin_layout Standard
42386 as described in section
42387 \begin_inset space ~
42391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42393 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42400 \begin_layout Subsection
42404 \begin_layout Standard
42409 as described in section
42410 \begin_inset space ~
42414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42416 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42423 \begin_layout Subsection
42425 \begin_inset Index idx
42428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42435 \begin_inset Index idx
42438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42447 \begin_layout Standard
42448 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42449 Floats are described in section
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42456 reference "sec:Floats"
42460 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42463 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42471 \begin_inset space ~
42479 \begin_layout Subsection
42483 \begin_layout Standard
42484 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42485 \begin_inset space ~
42489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42491 reference "sec:Index"
42498 \begin_layout Subsection
42502 \begin_layout Standard
42503 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42504 \begin_inset space ~
42508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42510 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42517 \begin_layout Subsection
42521 \begin_layout Standard
42522 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42523 Tables are described in section
42524 \begin_inset space ~
42528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42530 reference "sec:Tables"
42534 and in detail in the chapter
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_layout Subsection
42553 \begin_layout Standard
42559 Graphics are described in section
42560 \begin_inset space ~
42564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42566 reference "sec:Graphics"
42573 \begin_layout Subsection
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42578 Inserts a URL as described in section
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42585 reference "subsec:URLs"
42592 \begin_layout Subsection
42596 \begin_layout Standard
42597 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42598 \begin_inset space ~
42602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42604 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42611 \begin_layout Subsection
42615 \begin_layout Standard
42616 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42617 \begin_inset space ~
42621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42623 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42630 \begin_layout Subsection
42634 \begin_layout Standard
42635 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42642 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42649 \begin_layout Subsection
42652 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42655 \begin_layout Standard
42656 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42657 environments of the same type.
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42665 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42669 for an explanation.
42672 \begin_layout Subsection
42676 \begin_layout Standard
42677 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42678 title or caption of a float.
42679 Inserts a short title as described in section
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42686 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42693 \begin_layout Subsection
42698 \begin_layout Standard
42699 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42700 Code box as described in section
42701 \begin_inset space ~
42705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42707 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42714 \begin_layout Subsection
42716 \begin_inset Index idx
42719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42728 \begin_layout Standard
42729 Inserts a program listings box.
42730 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42732 Program Code Listings
42737 \begin_inset space ~
42745 \begin_layout Subsection
42747 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42751 \begin_layout Standard
42753 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42754 Inserts the actual date.
42755 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42762 \begin_layout Subsection
42766 \begin_layout Standard
42767 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42768 \begin_inset space ~
42772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42774 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42781 \begin_layout Section
42783 \begin_inset Index idx
42786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42795 \begin_layout Standard
42796 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42797 \begin_inset space ~
42800 of the current document.
42801 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42804 \begin_layout Subsection
42808 \begin_layout Standard
42809 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42810 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42811 to jump, for example, between section
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42816 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42817 \begin_inset space ~
42820 2.5 and use the submenu
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42827 \begin_inset space ~
42834 \begin_inset space ~
42840 \begin_inset space ~
42844 \begin_inset space ~
42850 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42854 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42860 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42863 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42866 \begin_layout Standard
42867 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42871 \begin_inset space ~
42876 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42884 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42887 \begin_layout Subsection
42888 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42892 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42896 \begin_layout Subsection
42900 \begin_layout Standard
42901 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42902 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42903 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42907 \begin_inset space ~
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42919 \begin_layout Subsection
42923 \begin_layout Standard
42924 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42927 The \SpecialChar LyX
42928 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42930 \begin_inset space ~
42938 \begin_inset space ~
42943 manual for a detailed description.
42946 \begin_layout Section
42948 \begin_inset Index idx
42951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42960 \begin_layout Subsection
42964 \begin_layout Standard
42965 Change Tracking is described in section
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42972 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42979 \begin_layout Subsection
42987 \begin_layout Standard
42988 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42989 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42990 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42992 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42993 to the clipboard or update the view.
42994 \begin_inset Newline newline
42997 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43001 \begin_layout Standard
43004 Open Containing Directory
43006 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43007 's temporary folder for the document.
43008 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43009 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43010 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43011 For example some journals require to send the
43015 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43019 \begin_layout Subsection
43020 Start Appendix Here
43023 \begin_layout Standard
43024 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43025 as described in section
43026 \begin_inset space ~
43030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43032 reference "sec:Appendices"
43039 \begin_layout Subsection
43041 \begin_inset space ~
43047 \begin_layout Standard
43048 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43049 default output format for the document (menu
43051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43052 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43053 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43055 \begin_inset space ~
43059 \begin_inset space ~
43065 \begin_inset space ~
43069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43071 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43075 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43078 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43079 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43081 \begin_inset space ~
43084 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43089 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43091 \begin_inset space ~
43095 \begin_inset space ~
43101 \begin_inset space ~
43105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43107 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43111 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43112 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43114 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43115 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43117 \begin_inset space ~
43120 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43122 \begin_inset space ~
43125 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43129 \begin_inset space ~
43133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43135 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43140 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43141 when it is first configured.
43142 The default output format is
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43153 \begin_layout Subsection
43154 View (Other Formats)
43157 \begin_layout Standard
43158 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43159 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43160 actual document with an external program.
43161 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43162 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43163 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43165 All possible formats are listed in section
43166 \begin_inset space ~
43170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43172 reference "subsec:Export"
43177 You should at least see the menu entry
43182 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43184 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43192 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43197 \begin_inset Index idx
43200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43201 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43210 \begin_layout Standard
43211 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43212 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43214 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43215 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43217 \begin_inset space ~
43220 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43225 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43229 \begin_inset space ~
43233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43235 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43240 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43241 when it is first configured.
43244 \begin_layout Subsection
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43252 \begin_layout Standard
43253 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43254 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43257 \begin_layout Subsection
43258 Update (Other Formats)
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43262 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43263 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43266 \begin_layout Subsection
43267 View Master Document
43270 \begin_layout Standard
43271 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43287 \begin_inset space ~
43292 manual for more information on this topic).
43293 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43294 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43298 \begin_inset space ~
43302 \begin_inset space ~
43307 generates the output of the whole book, while
43311 will just output the chapter alone.
43314 \begin_layout Standard
43315 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43316 in the document settings (menu
43318 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43319 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43320 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43322 \begin_inset space ~
43326 \begin_inset space ~
43332 \begin_inset space ~
43336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43338 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43342 ) or in the preferences (menu
43344 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43345 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43347 \begin_inset space ~
43350 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43352 \begin_inset space ~
43355 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43357 \begin_inset space ~
43361 \begin_inset space ~
43367 \begin_inset space ~
43371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43373 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43380 \begin_layout Subsection
43381 Update Master Document
43384 \begin_layout Standard
43385 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43401 \begin_inset space ~
43406 manual for more information on this topic).
43407 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43408 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43411 \begin_layout Standard
43412 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43413 in the document settings (menu
43415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43416 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43417 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43419 \begin_inset space ~
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43429 \begin_inset space ~
43433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43435 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43439 ) or in the preferences (menu
43441 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43442 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43444 \begin_inset space ~
43447 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43449 \begin_inset space ~
43452 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43470 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43477 \begin_layout Subsection
43479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43481 name "subsec:Compressed"
43488 \begin_layout Standard
43489 Un/compresses the current document.
43490 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43491 compression (see the
43493 Additional Features
43495 manual for details).
43498 \begin_layout Subsection
43502 \begin_layout Standard
43503 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43506 \begin_layout Subsection
43510 \begin_layout Standard
43511 The document settings are described in appendix
43512 \begin_inset space ~
43516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43518 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43525 \begin_layout Section
43527 \begin_inset Index idx
43530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43539 \begin_layout Subsection
43543 \begin_layout Standard
43544 Spell checking is explained in section
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43551 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43558 \begin_layout Subsection
43562 \begin_layout Standard
43563 The thesaurus is described in section
43564 \begin_inset space ~
43568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43570 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43577 \begin_layout Subsection
43579 \begin_inset Index idx
43582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43589 \begin_inset Index idx
43592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43601 \begin_layout Standard
43602 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43603 the highlighted document part.
43606 \begin_layout Subsection
43612 \begin_inset Index idx
43615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43616 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43625 \begin_layout Standard
43626 Generates with the help of the program
43628 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43631 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43632 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43633 This feature is not available on Windows.
43636 \begin_layout Subsection
43642 \begin_inset Index idx
43645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43655 \begin_layout Standard
43656 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43661 \begin_inset space ~
43666 to see the full filename paths.
43669 \begin_layout Subsection
43671 \begin_inset Index idx
43674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43683 \begin_layout Standard
43684 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43685 files as described in section
43686 \begin_inset space ~
43690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43692 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43699 \begin_layout Subsection
43701 \begin_inset Index idx
43704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43717 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43735 \begin_inset Index idx
43738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43739 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43748 \begin_layout Standard
43749 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43750 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43751 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43752 -packages and programs it needs; see
43754 \begin_inset space ~
43758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43760 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43767 \begin_layout Subsection
43771 \begin_layout Standard
43776 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43777 \begin_inset space ~
43781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43783 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43790 \begin_layout Section
43792 \begin_inset Index idx
43795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43804 \begin_layout Standard
43805 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43806 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43808 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43812 \begin_layout Standard
43816 \begin_inset space ~
43821 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43822 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43823 packages and classes found
43824 by \SpecialChar LyX
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43832 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43839 \begin_layout Standard
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43848 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43853 \begin_layout Section
43855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43857 name "sec:Toolbars"
43864 \begin_layout Standard
43865 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43866 \begin_inset space ~
43870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43872 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43879 \begin_layout Standard
43880 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43881 This is described in the
43883 Additional Features
43888 \begin_layout Subsection
43890 \begin_inset Index idx
43893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43902 \begin_layout Standard
43903 \begin_inset Graphics
43904 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43912 \begin_layout Standard
43913 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43919 \begin_layout Standard
43920 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43937 \begin_inset Note Note
43940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43941 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43946 manual for more information.
43954 \begin_layout Standard
43955 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43961 \begin_layout Standard
43962 \begin_inset Tabular
43963 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43964 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43965 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43972 \begin_inset Graphics
43973 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43987 pull-down box for the environments
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44001 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44007 \begin_layout Standard
44009 \begin_inset Tabular
44010 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
44011 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44012 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44013 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44037 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44067 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44097 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44113 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44127 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44143 arg "spelling-continuously"
44151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44155 Spellcheck continuously
44161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44184 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44306 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44311 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44329 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44343 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44369 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44411 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44425 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44426 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44454 Emphasize text, function of the
44455 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44463 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44465 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44471 arg "dialog-show character"
44482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44503 Set text to noun style, function of the
44504 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44512 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44520 arg "dialog-show character"
44531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44537 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44540 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44569 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44574 arg "textstyle-apply"
44584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44589 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44590 Format text using the current settings in the
44592 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44594 \begin_inset space ~
44597 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44608 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44632 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44634 \begin_inset space ~
44643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44652 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44680 arg "tabular-insert"
44688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44707 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44710 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44723 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44754 Toggle outline window on/off,
44756 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44784 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44799 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44811 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44824 \begin_layout Subsection
44826 \begin_inset Index idx
44829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44838 \begin_layout Standard
44839 \begin_inset Graphics
44840 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44848 \begin_layout Standard
44849 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44855 \begin_layout Standard
44856 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44860 \begin_layout Standard
44861 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44867 \begin_layout Standard
44868 \begin_inset Tabular
44869 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44870 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44871 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44872 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44909 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44963 arg "layout-toggle List"
44971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44990 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45017 arg "depth-increment"
45025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45031 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45055 arg "depth-decrement"
45063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45069 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45093 arg "float-insert figure"
45101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45108 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45124 arg "float-insert table"
45132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45139 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45146 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45185 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45215 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45270 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45279 arg "nomencl-insert"
45287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45313 arg "footnote-insert"
45321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45343 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45359 \begin_inset space ~
45368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45392 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45394 \begin_inset space ~
45403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45412 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45488 \begin_inset space ~
45497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45506 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45521 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45537 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45552 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45572 arg "dialog-show character"
45580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45588 \begin_inset space ~
45591 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45598 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45604 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45609 arg "textstyle-apply"
45617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45622 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45623 Format text using the recent settings in the
45626 arg "dialog-show character"
45635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45644 arg "layout-paragraph"
45652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45658 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45660 \begin_inset space ~
45669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45678 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45706 \begin_layout Subsection
45707 View/Update Toolbar
45708 \begin_inset Index idx
45711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45712 Toolbar ! View / Update
45720 \begin_layout Standard
45721 \begin_inset Graphics
45722 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45729 \begin_layout Standard
45730 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45736 \begin_layout Standard
45737 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45741 \begin_layout Standard
45742 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45748 \begin_layout Standard
45749 \begin_inset Tabular
45750 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45751 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45752 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45753 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45793 arg "buffer-update"
45801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45823 arg "master-buffer-view"
45831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45839 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
45841 \begin_inset space ~
45847 \begin_inset space ~
45856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45865 arg "master-buffer-update"
45873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45879 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45881 \begin_inset space ~
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45903 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45918 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45920 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
45922 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
45925 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45926 Synchronize with Output
45932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45960 View (Other Formats)
45966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45973 arg "update-others"
45977 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45992 Update (Other Formats)
46005 \begin_layout Standard
46007 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
46008 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46014 \begin_layout Subsection
46018 \begin_layout Standard
46019 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46020 \begin_inset space ~
46024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46026 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46030 , the table toolbar
46031 \begin_inset Index idx
46034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 \begin_inset space ~
46048 manual and the math macro toolbar
46049 \begin_inset Index idx
46052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46065 \begin_layout Chapter
46066 The Document Settings
46067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46069 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46074 \begin_inset Index idx
46077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 Document ! Settings
46086 \begin_layout Standard
46090 \begin_inset space ~
46095 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46096 is called with the menu
46098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46102 You can save your document settings as default with the
46104 Save as Document Defaults
46106 button in any dialog.
46107 This will create a template named
46111 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46112 when you create a new document without
46116 \begin_layout Standard
46121 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46122 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46125 \begin_layout Standard
46126 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46127 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46128 to find the one you are looking for.
46129 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46130 the submenus of the dialog.
46132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46136 \begin_inset space \space{}
46140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46147 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46148 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46149 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46152 \begin_layout Section
46156 \begin_layout Standard
46157 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46159 Document classes are described in section
46160 \begin_inset space ~
46164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46166 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46173 \begin_layout Standard
46177 \begin_inset space ~
46182 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46187 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46188 as a layout for a document class.
46189 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46191 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46200 \begin_layout Standard
46201 Some classes use special class options by default.
46202 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46206 and you can decide to use them or not.
46207 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46208 recommended you leave them untouched.
46213 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46214 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46219 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46221 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46227 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46228 \begin_inset Newline newline
46233 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46236 \begin_inset Newline newline
46239 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46240 distribution, see section
46245 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46247 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46260 \begin_layout Standard
46265 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46266 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46267 in the background if the child document
46268 is opened without its master.
46269 This way child documents are always compilable.
46270 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46285 \begin_layout Standard
46286 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46297 \begin_inset Index idx
46300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46302 packages ! prettyref
46308 \begin_inset Index idx
46311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46313 packages ! refstyle
46318 for cross-references, see section
46319 \begin_inset space ~
46323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46325 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46332 \begin_layout Section
46336 \begin_layout Standard
46337 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46338 Please refer to the section
46341 \begin_inset space ~
46349 \begin_inset space ~
46354 manual for details.
46357 \begin_layout Section
46361 \begin_layout Standard
46362 Modules are explained in section
46363 \begin_inset space ~
46367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46369 reference "subsec:Modules"
46376 \begin_layout Section
46380 \begin_layout Standard
46382 \begin_inset space ~
46386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46388 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46395 \begin_layout Section
46399 \begin_layout Standard
46400 The document font settings are described in section
46401 \begin_inset space ~
46405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46407 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46414 \begin_layout Section
46418 \begin_layout Standard
46419 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46431 \begin_inset space ~
46436 and whether it should be a
46439 \begin_inset space ~
46444 can also be specified here.
46447 \begin_layout Standard
46448 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46449 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46450 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46452 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46455 \begin_layout Standard
46458 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46461 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46462 justifies the text on screen.
46463 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46465 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46469 \begin_layout Standard
46471 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46480 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46485 \begin_layout Section
46489 \begin_layout Standard
46490 This dialog is described in sections
46491 \begin_inset space ~
46495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46497 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46504 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46511 \begin_layout Section
46515 \begin_layout Standard
46516 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46517 \begin_inset space ~
46521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46523 reference "subsec:Margins"
46530 \begin_layout Section
46532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46534 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46539 \begin_inset Index idx
46542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46543 Language ! Encoding
46551 \begin_layout Standard
46552 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46553 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46554 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46556 is always encoded in utf8).
46557 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46558 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46559 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46560 -command is not known for
46561 a particular character).
46562 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46566 \begin_layout Standard
46568 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46569 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46570 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46571 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46572 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46573 's default encoding).
46574 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46575 's Unicode support covers the
46576 characters of most scripts.
46577 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46578 using one of the traditional, or
46579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46586 , encodings is necessary.
46589 \begin_layout Standard
46591 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46593 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46596 Traditional (auto-selected)
46602 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46603 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46604 the given language(s).
46606 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46610 \begin_layout Standard
46612 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46613 If you use the option
46618 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46621 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46622 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46625 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46628 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46629 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46630 exactly one encoding.
46631 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46636 \begin_layout Standard
46638 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46639 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46645 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46646 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46650 \begin_layout Standard
46652 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46653 Finally, you can also select
46657 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46658 Note that this encoding is then used for
46663 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46664 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46668 \begin_layout Standard
46670 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46673 Do not load inputenc
46675 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46676 from automatically loading the
46683 \begin_inset Index idx
46686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46688 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46690 packages ! inputenc
46698 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46699 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46700 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46701 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46702 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46704 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46710 Traditional (auto-selected)
46717 \begin_layout Standard
46719 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46721 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46722 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46723 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46724 installation supports Unicode), choose
46725 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46726 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46727 is quite incomplete, so
46728 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46733 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46734 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46735 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46736 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46737 -commands is not used, because all
46738 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46739 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46740 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46741 , two new alternative engines
46742 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46744 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46746 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46749 \begin_inset space ~
46757 \begin_inset space ~
46765 \begin_inset space ~
46771 \begin_inset space ~
46775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46777 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46782 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46786 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46791 \begin_layout Standard
46795 \begin_inset space ~
46800 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46801 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46811 The possible settings are:
46814 \begin_layout Description
46815 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46817 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46818 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46822 \begin_inset space ~
46826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46828 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46835 \begin_layout Description
46836 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46837 format you will use.
46838 In many cases this will be
46843 \begin_inset Index idx
46846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46854 If the newer package
46859 \begin_inset Index idx
46862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46864 packages ! polyglossia
46869 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46870 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46871 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46873 this package will be used instead of
46880 \begin_layout Description
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46893 would be more appropriate.
46896 \begin_layout Description
46897 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46898 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46902 (for German texts), type in
46905 \begin_inset Newline newline
46910 usepackage{ngerman}
46913 \begin_layout Description
46914 None will not use a language package.
46915 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46918 \begin_layout Standard
46919 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46922 \begin_layout Description
46924 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46926 \begin_inset space ~
46930 \begin_inset space ~
46934 \begin_inset space ~
46941 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46947 \begin_inset Index idx
46950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46952 packages ! inputenc
46958 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46959 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46960 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46966 \begin_layout Description
46967 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46969 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46970 commands, which may result in a big
46971 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46972 -commands are needed.
46974 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46975 This is the same as the
46988 \begin_layout Description
46990 \begin_inset space ~
46994 \begin_inset space ~
46997 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47000 \begin_layout Description
47002 \begin_inset space ~
47006 \begin_inset space ~
47009 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47012 \begin_layout Description
47014 \begin_inset space ~
47017 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47020 \begin_layout Description
47022 \begin_inset space ~
47026 \begin_inset space ~
47029 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47030 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47033 \begin_layout Description
47035 \begin_inset space ~
47039 \begin_inset space ~
47042 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47046 \begin_layout Description
47048 \begin_inset space ~
47052 \begin_inset space ~
47055 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47056 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47059 \begin_layout Description
47061 \begin_inset space ~
47065 \begin_inset space ~
47069 \begin_inset space ~
47072 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47073 \begin_inset space ~
47079 \begin_layout Description
47081 \begin_inset space ~
47085 \begin_inset space ~
47089 \begin_inset space ~
47092 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47093 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47096 \begin_layout Description
47098 \begin_inset space ~
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47105 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47106 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47107 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47108 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47109 \begin_inset space ~
47113 \begin_inset space ~
47119 \begin_layout Description
47121 \begin_inset space ~
47125 \begin_inset space ~
47128 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47129 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47130 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47132 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47133 \begin_inset space ~
47137 \begin_inset space ~
47143 \begin_layout Description
47145 \begin_inset space ~
47149 \begin_inset space ~
47152 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47155 \begin_layout Description
47157 \begin_inset space ~
47161 \begin_inset space ~
47164 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47167 \begin_layout Description
47169 \begin_inset space ~
47173 \begin_inset space ~
47176 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47179 \begin_layout Description
47181 \begin_inset space ~
47184 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47187 \begin_layout Description
47189 \begin_inset space ~
47192 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47195 \begin_layout Description
47197 \begin_inset space ~
47201 \begin_inset space ~
47204 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47207 \begin_layout Description
47209 \begin_inset space ~
47213 \begin_inset space ~
47219 \begin_layout Description
47221 \begin_inset space ~
47225 \begin_inset space ~
47228 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47231 \begin_layout Description
47233 \begin_inset space ~
47237 \begin_inset space ~
47243 \begin_layout Description
47245 \begin_inset space ~
47249 \begin_inset space ~
47252 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47258 \begin_inset Index idx
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47268 , when using this, set the document language to
47273 \begin_layout Description
47275 \begin_inset space ~
47279 \begin_inset space ~
47282 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47287 , when using this, set the document language to
47290 \begin_inset space ~
47296 \begin_layout Description
47298 \begin_inset space ~
47302 \begin_inset space ~
47305 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47311 \begin_inset Index idx
47314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47316 packages ! japanese
47321 , when using this, set the document language to
47326 \begin_layout Description
47328 \begin_inset space ~
47332 \begin_inset space ~
47335 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47340 , when using this, set the document language to
47345 \begin_layout Description
47347 \begin_inset space ~
47351 \begin_inset space ~
47354 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47359 , when using this, set the document language to
47364 \begin_layout Description
47366 \begin_inset space ~
47369 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47372 \begin_layout Description
47374 \begin_inset space ~
47378 \begin_inset space ~
47382 \begin_inset space ~
47385 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47388 \begin_layout Description
47390 \begin_inset space ~
47394 \begin_inset space ~
47398 \begin_inset space ~
47401 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47402 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47403 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47406 \begin_layout Description
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47412 \begin_inset space ~
47418 \begin_layout Description
47420 \begin_inset space ~
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47427 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47428 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47431 \begin_layout Description
47433 \begin_inset space ~
47437 \begin_inset space ~
47440 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47446 \begin_inset Index idx
47449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47456 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47457 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47459 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47460 with the default encoding (
47462 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47468 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47469 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47474 \begin_layout Description
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47487 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47494 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47497 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47504 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47505 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47507 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47510 \begin_layout Description
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47516 \begin_inset space ~
47519 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47525 \begin_inset Index idx
47528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47536 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47539 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47541 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47542 This used to be more comprehensive than
47545 \begin_inset space ~
47550 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47555 \begin_layout Description
47557 \begin_inset space ~
47560 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47566 \begin_inset Index idx
47569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47571 packages ! inputenc
47578 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47579 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47581 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47582 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47583 with the default encoding (
47585 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47591 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47592 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47597 \begin_layout Description
47599 \begin_inset space ~
47603 \begin_inset space ~
47607 \begin_inset space ~
47610 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47611 \begin_inset space ~
47617 \begin_layout Description
47619 \begin_inset space ~
47623 \begin_inset space ~
47627 \begin_inset space ~
47630 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47631 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47632 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47636 \begin_layout Description
47638 \begin_inset space ~
47642 \begin_inset space ~
47646 \begin_inset space ~
47649 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47650 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47653 \begin_layout Section
47655 \begin_inset Index idx
47658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47665 \begin_inset Index idx
47668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47675 \begin_inset Index idx
47678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47679 Color ! Shaded boxes
47685 \begin_inset Index idx
47688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47689 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47697 \begin_layout Standard
47698 Here you can alter the font color for the
47702 (default: black), for
47705 \begin_inset space ~
47710 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47714 (default: white) and for
47717 \begin_inset space ~
47727 sets the color back to the default.
47730 \begin_layout Standard
47731 Clicking any button showing
47739 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47740 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47741 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47742 later more quickly.
47745 \begin_layout Standard
47746 Note, if you change the
47749 \begin_inset space ~
47754 font color and use the option
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47762 in the document settings under
47765 \begin_inset space ~
47770 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47771 \begin_inset space ~
47775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47777 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47784 \begin_layout Standard
47785 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47791 \begin_layout Standard
47795 \begin_inset space ~
47804 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47807 \begin_inset space ~
47810 Code after a forced page break:
47813 \begin_layout Itemize
47814 For the page color:
47815 \begin_inset Newline newline
47822 pagecolor{color name}
47825 \begin_layout Itemize
47826 For the text color:
47827 \begin_inset Newline newline
47837 \begin_layout Standard
47838 You are restricted to one of
47874 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47881 \begin_inset space ~
47887 \begin_inset Newline newline
47890 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47891 names to refer to them:
47894 \begin_layout Itemize
47900 \begin_inset Newline newline
47905 page_backgroundcolor
47908 \begin_layout Itemize
47912 \begin_inset space ~
47918 \begin_inset Newline newline
47926 \begin_layout Itemize
47930 \begin_inset space ~
47936 \begin_inset Newline newline
47944 \begin_layout Itemize
47948 \begin_inset space ~
47954 \begin_inset Newline newline
47962 \begin_layout Standard
47963 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47966 \begin_inset space ~
47974 \begin_inset space ~
47982 \begin_layout Section
47984 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47988 \begin_layout Standard
47990 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47991 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47992 \begin_inset space ~
47996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47998 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48006 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
48007 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
48010 \begin_layout Standard
48012 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
48013 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
48015 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
48018 \begin_layout Section
48022 \begin_layout Standard
48023 Here you can adjust the
48027 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48031 as described in section
48032 \begin_inset space ~
48036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48038 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48043 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
48047 \begin_layout Standard
48049 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
48050 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
48052 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
48053 of this package can be used as well.
48054 The most common one are:
48057 \begin_layout Description
48059 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
48060 right Line numbers to the right margin
48063 \begin_layout Description
48065 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
48066 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
48070 \begin_layout Description
48072 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
48073 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
48076 \begin_layout Description
48078 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
48079 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
48082 \begin_layout Description
48084 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
48085 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
48088 \begin_layout Description
48090 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
48092 \begin_inset space ~
48095 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48100 \begin_layout Section
48104 \begin_layout Standard
48105 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48111 \begin_inset Index idx
48114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48116 packages ! biblatex
48126 \begin_inset Index idx
48129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48141 \begin_inset Index idx
48144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48152 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48155 Sectioned bibliography
48157 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48163 \begin_inset Index idx
48166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48168 packages ! bibtopic
48178 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48179 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48183 for the generation of the bibliography.
48184 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48185 \begin_inset space ~
48189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48191 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48198 \begin_layout Section
48202 \begin_layout Standard
48203 Here you can define the
48207 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48209 \begin_inset space ~
48213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48215 reference "sec:Index"
48222 \begin_layout Section
48226 \begin_layout Standard
48227 The PDF properties are explained in section
48228 \begin_inset space ~
48232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48234 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48241 \begin_layout Section
48245 \begin_layout Standard
48246 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48247 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48253 \begin_inset Index idx
48256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48268 \begin_inset Index idx
48271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48283 \begin_inset Index idx
48286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48298 \begin_inset Index idx
48301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48313 \begin_inset Index idx
48316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48318 packages ! mathdots
48328 \begin_inset Index idx
48331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48333 packages ! mathtools
48343 \begin_inset Index idx
48346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48358 \begin_inset Index idx
48361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48363 packages ! stackrel
48373 \begin_inset Index idx
48376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48378 packages ! stmaryrd
48388 \begin_inset Index idx
48391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48393 packages ! undertilde
48398 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48401 \begin_layout Description
48402 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48403 -errors in formulas,
48404 ensure that you have this enabled.
48407 \begin_layout Description
48408 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48409 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48410 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48414 \begin_layout Description
48415 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48418 \begin_inset space ~
48430 \begin_layout Description
48431 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48434 \begin_inset space ~
48446 \begin_layout Description
48447 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48458 \begin_layout Description
48459 mathtools is used for the math commands
48495 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48502 \begin_layout Description
48503 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48505 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48514 \begin_layout Description
48515 stackrel is used for the math command
48532 \begin_layout Description
48533 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48536 \begin_layout Description
48537 undertilde is used for the math command
48545 Accents for one Character
48554 \begin_layout Section
48556 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48558 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48564 \begin_layout Standard
48566 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48567 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48570 \begin_layout Standard
48572 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48573 The float placement options
48574 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48577 are described in the section
48580 \begin_inset space ~
48584 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48586 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48594 \begin_inset space ~
48602 \begin_layout Section
48606 \begin_layout Standard
48607 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48609 Program Code Listings
48614 \begin_inset space ~
48622 \begin_layout Section
48626 \begin_layout Standard
48627 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48635 set to be used and set the
48640 The itemize environment is described in section
48641 \begin_inset space ~
48645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48647 reference "sec:Itemize"
48654 \begin_layout Standard
48655 You can furthermore specify a
48658 \begin_inset space ~
48663 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48664 command of the desired character.
48665 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48672 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48678 \begin_inset space \space{}
48682 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48692 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48693 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48696 \begin_layout Standard
48697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48705 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48706 -packages in the preamble (menu
48709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48710 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48713 \begin_inset space ~
48719 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48723 usepackage{textcomp}
48726 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48730 usepackage{amssymb}
48740 \begin_layout Section
48744 \begin_layout Standard
48745 Branches are described in section
48746 \begin_inset space ~
48750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48752 reference "sec:Branches"
48759 \begin_layout Section
48761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48763 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48770 \begin_layout Standard
48771 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48774 \begin_layout Description
48776 \begin_inset space ~
48780 \begin_inset space ~
48783 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48803 View Master Document
48804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48811 Update Master Document
48812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48819 menu or the toolbar.
48820 The default is set in
48822 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48823 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48825 \begin_inset space ~
48828 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48832 \begin_inset space ~
48836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48838 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48845 \begin_layout Description
48847 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48849 \begin_inset space ~
48853 \begin_inset space ~
48857 \begin_inset space ~
48860 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48865 option which is needed with some packages.
48866 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48867 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48870 \begin_layout Description
48872 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48874 \begin_inset space ~
48878 \begin_inset space ~
48881 Options offers settings for the
48889 \begin_layout Itemize
48893 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48895 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48897 \begin_inset space ~
48903 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48905 \begin_inset space ~
48909 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48915 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48917 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48918 settings for the menu
48920 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48924 \begin_inset space ~
48928 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48931 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48932 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48937 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48939 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48941 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48944 or a detailed description see section
48946 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48951 \begin_inset space ~
48957 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48961 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48965 \begin_layout Itemize
48967 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48970 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48972 determines whether so-called
48973 \begin_inset Quotes els
48977 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48981 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48983 \begin_inset Quotes els
48987 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48990 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48991 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48992 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48994 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48996 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48997 macros, you can uncheck this.
48998 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
49005 \begin_layout Description
49007 \begin_inset space ~
49011 \begin_inset space ~
49014 Options offers settings for the export format
49022 \begin_inset space ~
49027 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49028 \begin_inset space ~
49031 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49035 \begin_inset space ~
49040 settings are described in detail in section
49042 Math Output in XHTML
49047 \begin_inset space ~
49056 \begin_inset space ~
49060 \begin_inset space ~
49065 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49068 \begin_layout Description
49070 \begin_inset space ~
49075 Save transient properties
49077 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49078 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49079 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49083 \begin_layout Itemize
49084 the activation of change tracking
49087 \begin_layout Itemize
49088 the output of tracked changes
49091 \begin_layout Itemize
49092 the recording of the document directory path.
49095 \begin_layout Standard
49096 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49097 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49101 \begin_layout Section
49109 \begin_layout Standard
49110 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49112 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49114 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49116 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49120 \begin_layout Standard
49121 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49122 -syntax is given in section
49123 \begin_inset space ~
49127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49129 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49136 \begin_layout Chapter
49142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49144 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49149 \begin_inset Index idx
49152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49161 \begin_layout Standard
49162 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49164 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49168 It has the following submenus.
49171 \begin_layout Section
49175 \begin_layout Subsection
49179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49180 User Interface File
49181 \begin_inset Index idx
49184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49185 Customization ! of toolbars
49191 \begin_inset Index idx
49194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49195 Customization ! of menus
49203 \begin_layout Standard
49204 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49205 interface (ui) file.
49206 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49214 \begin_layout Description
49219 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49222 \begin_layout Description
49229 the menu entries in popup context menus
49232 \begin_layout Description
49237 specifies the toolbar buttons
49240 \begin_layout Standard
49241 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49242 and edit the entries.
49245 \begin_layout Standard
49246 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49258 entries must be finished with an explicit
49283 and in the case of the
49284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49296 The syntax for the entries is:
49299 \begin_layout Standard
49300 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49329 \begin_layout Standard
49331 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49334 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49335 -functions are listed in the menu
49337 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49339 \begin_inset space ~
49347 \begin_layout Standard
49348 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49354 \begin_layout Standard
49355 For example, assuming you use the menu
49357 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49360 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49364 \begin_layout Standard
49365 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49389 \begin_layout Standard
49391 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49406 to have the sixth bookmark.
49409 \begin_layout Standard
49413 \begin_inset space ~
49418 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49419 's toolbar buttons.
49420 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49424 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49432 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49436 \begin_layout Standard
49439 Enable tool tips in main work area
49441 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49445 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49449 \begin_layout Standard
49454 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49455 should display in the menu
49457 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49459 \begin_inset space ~
49467 \begin_layout Subsection
49471 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49475 \begin_layout Standard
49478 Restore window layouts and geometries
49481 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49482 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49486 \begin_layout Standard
49489 Restore cursor positions
49491 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49495 \begin_layout Standard
49498 Load opened files from last session
49500 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49504 \begin_layout Standard
49507 Clear all session information
49509 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49510 sessions (cursor positions, names
49511 of last opened documents, etc.).
49514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49518 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49523 \begin_inset Index idx
49526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49535 \begin_layout Standard
49538 Backup original documents when saving
49540 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49541 it was saved the last time.
49542 It is stored in the
49545 \begin_inset space ~
49551 \begin_inset space ~
49555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49557 reference "sec:Paths"
49561 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49564 \begin_inset space ~
49570 The backup file has the file extension
49571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49585 \begin_layout Standard
49588 Backup documents, every
49590 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49593 \begin_layout Standard
49596 Save documents compressed by default
49598 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49599 \begin_inset space ~
49603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49605 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49610 This applies to newly created documents only.
49611 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49615 Windows & work area
49618 \begin_layout Standard
49621 Open documents in tabs
49623 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49627 \begin_layout Standard
49632 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49639 \begin_inset space ~
49643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49645 reference "sec:Paths"
49649 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49656 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49657 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49658 of \SpecialChar LyX
49660 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49661 instance is created for each file.
49664 \begin_layout Standard
49667 Single close-tab button
49669 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49679 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49680 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49681 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49685 \begin_layout Standard
49686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49694 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49695 before the change takes effect.
49703 \begin_layout Standard
49708 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49710 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49712 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49716 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49717 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49718 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49721 \begin_layout Subsection
49723 \begin_inset Index idx
49726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49735 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49742 \begin_layout Standard
49743 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49747 \begin_layout Standard
49748 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49756 This section only deals with the fonts
49760 the \SpecialChar LyX
49762 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49766 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49777 \begin_layout Standard
49778 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49795 (depends on the system) as its
49798 \begin_inset space ~
49814 \begin_layout Standard
49815 You can change the font size with the
49822 \begin_layout Standard
49827 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49832 points have the size of 1
49833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49837 \begin_inset space ~
49841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49843 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49848 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49853 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49854 \begin_inset space ~
49858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49860 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49867 \begin_layout Subsection
49869 \begin_inset Index idx
49872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49873 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49880 \begin_inset Index idx
49883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49892 \begin_layout Standard
49893 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49894 by choosing an item in the
49895 list and selecting the
49902 \begin_layout Standard
49903 By checking the option
49907 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49910 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49911 \begin_inset space ~
49915 \begin_inset space ~
49920 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49923 \begin_layout Subsection
49925 \begin_inset Index idx
49928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49937 \begin_layout Standard
49938 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49942 \begin_layout Standard
49947 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49948 This feature is described in section
49949 \begin_inset space ~
49953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49955 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49962 \begin_layout Standard
49963 Checking the option
49966 \begin_inset space ~
49970 \begin_inset space ~
49974 \begin_inset space ~
49979 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49982 \begin_layout Section
49984 \begin_inset Index idx
49987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49996 \begin_layout Subsection
50000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50004 \begin_layout Standard
50007 Cursor follows scrollbar
50009 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50013 \begin_layout Standard
50014 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50015 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50016 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50019 \begin_layout Standard
50022 Scroll below end of document
50024 is self-explanatory.
50027 \begin_layout Standard
50028 In \SpecialChar LyX
50029 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50036 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50038 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50039 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50040 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
50044 \begin_layout Standard
50046 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
50049 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
50051 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
50052 paste operations (i.
50053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50056 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
50057 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
50058 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
50059 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
50060 dissolving from insets.
50065 \begin_layout Standard
50068 Sort environments alphabetically
50070 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50073 \begin_layout Standard
50076 Group environments by their category
50078 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50081 \begin_layout Standard
50086 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50095 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50099 \begin_layout Standard
50101 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50104 Search drive for cited files
50106 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50107 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50110 \begin_inset space ~
50114 \begin_inset space ~
50118 \begin_inset space ~
50122 \begin_inset space ~
50125 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50128 context menu on a citation.
50133 field determines the search pattern.
50135 \begin_inset space ~
50139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50141 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50154 \begin_layout Standard
50155 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50160 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50161 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50165 \begin_layout Subsection
50167 \begin_inset Index idx
50170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50177 \begin_inset Index idx
50180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50181 Settings ! Shortcuts
50189 \begin_layout Standard
50194 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50196 Several binding files are available, among them:
50199 \begin_layout Description
50200 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50203 \begin_layout Description
50204 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50216 \begin_layout Description
50217 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50228 \begin_layout Standard
50229 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50234 , and binding files for special languages.
50235 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50240 \begin_inset space \space{}
50244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50252 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50253 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50254 will try to use the appropriate binding
50258 \begin_layout Standard
50259 Some binding files, like
50263 , only have a limited scope.
50264 When looking at the end of the file
50268 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50271 \begin_layout Standard
50275 \begin_inset space ~
50279 \begin_inset space ~
50284 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50285 in the selected key binding file.
50288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50292 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50297 \begin_inset Index idx
50300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50301 Key Bindings ! Editing
50309 \begin_layout Standard
50310 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50311 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50312 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50313 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50316 Show key-bindings containing
50319 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50320 Insert there for example as keyword
50321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50328 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50329 functions that contain
50330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50338 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50339 All \SpecialChar LyX
50340 functions are also listed in the file
50345 that you will find in the
50352 \begin_layout Standard
50353 For example, to add the shortcut
50361 , select the function and press the
50366 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50367 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50370 \begin_layout Standard
50371 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50372 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50377 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
50379 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
50384 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
50387 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50391 \begin_layout Standard
50392 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50395 \begin_layout Standard
50396 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50398 The syntax of the entries is:
50401 \begin_layout Standard
50407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50426 \begin_layout Standard
50427 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50428 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50456 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50457 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50458 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50459 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50461 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50465 , you needed to specify it as
50470 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50473 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50476 \begin_layout Subsection
50478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50480 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50485 \begin_inset Index idx
50488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50495 \begin_inset Index idx
50498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50499 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50507 \begin_layout Standard
50508 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50509 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50510 provides keyboard maps.
50511 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50512 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50515 \begin_inset space ~
50519 \begin_inset space ~
50524 and select the keyboard map file named
50531 \begin_layout Standard
50540 keyboard map and, if you use the
50544 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50547 arg "keymap-primary"
50553 arg "keymap-secondary"
50556 respectively or toggle between them with
50559 arg "keymap-toggle"
50565 \begin_layout Standard
50566 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50574 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50583 \begin_layout Standard
50584 You can also specify the mouse
50586 Wheel scrolling speed
50589 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50593 Middle mouse button pasting
50595 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50596 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50599 \begin_layout Standard
50607 \begin_inset space ~
50611 \begin_inset space ~
50616 you can select a key for zooming.
50617 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50620 \begin_layout Subsection
50624 \begin_layout Standard
50625 Input completion is described in section
50626 \begin_inset space ~
50630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50632 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50639 \begin_layout Section
50641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50648 \begin_inset Index idx
50651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50658 \begin_inset Index idx
50661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50670 \begin_layout Standard
50671 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50672 are normally determined during
50674 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50677 \begin_layout Description
50679 \begin_inset space ~
50682 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50683 's working directory.
50684 It is the default when you
50695 \begin_inset space ~
50703 \begin_layout Description
50705 \begin_inset space ~
50708 templates This directory
50709 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50710 contains the templates that are shown
50711 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50712 will be opened when you use the menu
50713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50718 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50720 \begin_inset space ~
50724 \begin_inset space ~
50732 \begin_layout Description
50734 \begin_inset space ~
50737 files This directory
50738 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50739 will be opened when you use the
50740 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50741 contains the example files that are listed in
50744 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50753 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50755 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50757 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50763 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50765 \begin_inset Newline newline
50769 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50781 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50782 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50792 \begin_layout Description
50794 \begin_inset space ~
50798 \begin_inset Index idx
50801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50807 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50808 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50809 \begin_inset space ~
50813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50815 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50823 will be used to save the backups.
50824 \begin_inset Newline newline
50827 Backup files have the ending
50828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50838 \begin_layout Description
50840 \begin_inset space ~
50843 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50844 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50846 \begin_inset Newline newline
50853 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50859 You can edit this file with the program
50868 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50869 in its preferences under
50872 \begin_inset space ~
50878 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50883 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50885 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50886 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50892 and \SpecialChar LyX
50893 need to be running the same time.
50894 \begin_inset Newline newline
50897 The pipe is also used for the
50901 feature, see section
50902 \begin_inset space ~
50906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50908 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50913 \begin_inset Newline newline
50916 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50917 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50918 \begin_inset Newline newline
50934 \begin_layout Description
50936 \begin_inset space ~
50939 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50942 \begin_layout Description
50944 \begin_inset space ~
50947 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50948 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50949 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50952 \begin_layout Description
50954 \begin_inset space ~
50957 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50963 You only need to specify it if you are using
50967 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50969 For \SpecialChar LyX
50974 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50978 \begin_layout Description
50980 \begin_inset space ~
50983 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50984 When \SpecialChar LyX
50985 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50986 to find it on the system.
50987 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50989 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50998 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50999 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51002 \begin_layout Description
51004 \begin_inset space ~
51007 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51008 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51009 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51010 code or in the document
51012 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51014 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51015 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51016 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51017 scanned for the input files.
51018 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51019 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51021 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51022 compilation may fail for some documents.
51025 \begin_layout Section
51029 \begin_layout Standard
51030 Here you can insert your
51039 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51041 \begin_inset space ~
51045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51047 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51051 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51054 \begin_layout Section
51056 \begin_inset Index idx
51059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51060 Language ! Settings
51066 \begin_inset Index idx
51069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51070 Settings ! Language
51078 \begin_layout Subsection
51080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51082 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51089 \begin_layout Description
51091 \begin_inset space ~
51095 \begin_inset space ~
51098 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51100 You can find its actual translation status here:
51101 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51103 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51109 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51115 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51116 LaTeX Language Support
51121 \begin_layout Description
51123 \begin_inset space ~
51126 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51127 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51128 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51129 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51146 The most widespread language package is
51151 \begin_inset Index idx
51154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51161 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51163 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51164 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51165 come with the alternative
51171 \begin_inset Index idx
51174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51176 packages ! polyglossia
51181 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51182 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51188 The available selections are described in section
51189 \begin_inset space ~
51193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51195 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51202 \begin_layout Description
51204 \begin_inset space ~
51208 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51209 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51210 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51212 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51216 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51220 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51222 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51226 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51227 that is used to switch to a different language
51228 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51229 to start the package
51233 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51234 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51238 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51239 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51242 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51246 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51254 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51262 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51265 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51267 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51271 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51289 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51290 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51297 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51298 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51303 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51308 , this setting is ignored.
51313 \begin_layout Description
51315 \begin_inset space ~
51319 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51326 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51327 Use this if the language switch set in
51331 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51335 's alternative command
51339 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51340 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51343 end{otherlanguage*}
51347 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51348 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51349 command toggles the package on and off
51350 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51351 Empty by default, as
51355 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51357 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51362 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51368 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51373 , this setting is ignored.
51378 \begin_layout Description
51380 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51382 \begin_inset space ~
51386 \begin_inset space ~
51389 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51393 \begin_layout Description
51395 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51397 \begin_inset space ~
51401 \begin_inset space ~
51404 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51410 \begin_layout Description
51412 \begin_inset space ~
51416 \begin_inset space ~
51420 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51422 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51425 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51426 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51429 to the document class options
51430 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51431 rather than the language package options.
51432 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51436 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51437 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51439 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51440 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51442 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51447 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51448 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51457 \begin_layout Description
51459 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51461 \begin_inset space ~
51465 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51467 \begin_inset space ~
51471 \begin_inset space ~
51475 \begin_inset space ~
51481 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51483 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51486 this option is set,
51487 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51488 the language switch defined in
51491 \begin_inset space ~
51496 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51497 to the document language.
51498 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51499 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51502 \begin_inset space ~
51507 or if a package resets the document language.
51508 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51509 usually should be the document language).
51510 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51511 documents start with the chosen document language.
51512 When this option is not set, the
51515 \begin_inset space ~
51520 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51522 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51525 \begin_inset space ~
51535 \begin_layout Description
51537 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51539 \begin_inset space ~
51543 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51545 \begin_inset space ~
51549 \begin_inset space ~
51553 \begin_inset space ~
51559 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51563 \begin_inset space ~
51567 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51568 Set document language explicitly
51574 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51576 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51582 \begin_inset space ~
51588 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51590 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51594 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51596 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51599 the end of the document.
51600 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51605 \paragraph_spacing single
51607 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51613 \begin_layout Description
51615 \begin_inset space ~
51619 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51621 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51625 \begin_inset space ~
51629 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51631 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51633 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51637 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51640 in a language different
51641 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51643 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51646 the document language will be
51647 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51648 marked (by default with a blue
51651 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51653 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51657 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51661 \begin_layout Description
51663 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51665 \begin_inset space ~
51669 \begin_inset space ~
51673 \begin_inset space ~
51676 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51677 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51678 switched via the operating system.
51679 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51684 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51685 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51690 \begin_layout Description
51692 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51694 \begin_inset space ~
51698 \begin_inset space ~
51701 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51702 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51707 \begin_layout Description
51709 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51711 \begin_inset space ~
51715 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51717 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51721 \begin_inset space ~
51725 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51726 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51727 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51729 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51733 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51735 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51736 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51738 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51739 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51740 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51742 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51747 \begin_layout Standard
51752 means that the cursor
51753 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51754 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51755 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51760 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51761 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51765 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51767 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51768 specific case always means: move
51772 in text (even if this means:
51778 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51779 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51780 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51781 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51782 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51794 \begin_layout Standard
51796 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51801 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51802 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51803 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51807 ) when coming from the left.
51808 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51810 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51811 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51812 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51819 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51823 \begin_layout Description
51825 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51827 \begin_inset space ~
51831 \begin_inset space ~
51834 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51835 separator alignment).
51836 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51841 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51842 (static) custom character here.
51845 \begin_layout Description
51847 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51849 \begin_inset space ~
51853 \begin_inset space ~
51856 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51862 \begin_layout Subsection
51866 \begin_layout Standard
51867 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51868 \begin_inset space ~
51872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51874 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51881 \begin_layout Section
51885 \begin_layout Subsection
51887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51889 name "subsec:General-output"
51896 \begin_layout Description
51898 \begin_inset space ~
51901 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51903 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51905 \begin_inset space ~
51911 For a detailed description see section
51913 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51918 \begin_inset space ~
51926 \begin_layout Description
51928 \begin_inset space ~
51931 Options Options for the program
51935 that is used for the export format
51940 \begin_inset space ~
51944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51946 reference "subsec:Export"
51951 Possible options are listed in the
51956 \begin_inset Newline newline
51960 \begin_inset Flex URL
51963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51965 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51975 \begin_layout Description
51977 \begin_inset space ~
51981 \begin_inset space ~
51984 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51987 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51988 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51990 \begin_inset space ~
51996 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51999 \begin_layout Description
52001 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
52003 \begin_inset space ~
52007 \begin_inset Index idx
52010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52017 \begin_inset Index idx
52020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52021 Settings ! Date format
52026 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52027 \begin_inset Newline newline
52031 \begin_inset Flex URL
52034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52036 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52042 \begin_inset Newline newline
52045 For example the format
52046 \begin_inset Newline newline
52050 \begin_inset Newline newline
52053 prints the date as day/month/year.
52058 \begin_layout Description
52060 \begin_inset space ~
52064 \begin_inset space ~
52067 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52068 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52071 \begin_layout Subsection
52077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52079 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52084 \begin_inset Index idx
52087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52088 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
52097 \begin_layout Description
52099 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52101 \begin_inset space ~
52109 \begin_inset space ~
52113 \begin_inset space ~
52116 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52121 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52142 are used for Cyrillic.
52143 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52156 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52158 sets up in the background.
52159 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52164 \begin_layout Description
52166 \begin_inset space ~
52170 \begin_inset space ~
52174 \begin_inset space ~
52178 \begin_inset space ~
52181 options They only have an effect when the program
52185 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52188 \begin_layout Standard
52189 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52190 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52191 manuals of the applications.
52194 \begin_layout Description
52196 \begin_inset space ~
52199 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52200 \begin_inset space ~
52204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52206 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52213 \begin_layout Description
52215 \begin_inset space ~
52218 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52219 \begin_inset space ~
52223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52225 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52232 \begin_layout Description
52234 \begin_inset space ~
52237 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52238 \begin_inset space ~
52242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52244 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52251 \begin_layout Description
52257 \begin_inset space ~
52260 command Command for the program
52262 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52265 that is described in the section
52267 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52272 Additional Features
52277 \begin_layout Standard
52278 There are additionally the following options:
52281 \begin_layout Description
52283 \begin_inset space ~
52287 \begin_inset space ~
52291 \begin_inset space ~
52295 \begin_inset space ~
52300 \begin_inset space ~
52303 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52321 to separate folders.
52322 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52324 \begin_inset Index idx
52327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52334 \begin_inset Index idx
52337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52346 \begin_layout Description
52348 \begin_inset space ~
52352 \begin_inset space ~
52356 \begin_inset space ~
52360 \begin_inset space ~
52364 \begin_inset space ~
52368 \begin_inset space ~
52371 changes Removes all manually set
52377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52378 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52380 \begin_inset space ~
52385 dialog when changing the document class.
52388 \begin_layout Section
52390 \begin_inset space ~
52394 \begin_inset Index idx
52397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52406 \begin_layout Subsection
52408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52410 name "subsec:Converters"
52415 \begin_inset Index idx
52418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52427 \begin_layout Standard
52428 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52429 from one format to another.
52430 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52431 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52438 \begin_inset space ~
52443 field and press the
52448 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52452 \begin_inset space ~
52457 drop-down list, modify the
52461 field and press the
52468 \begin_layout Standard
52471 Converter File Cache
52477 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52479 Maximum Age (in days
52482 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52483 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52486 \begin_layout Standard
52487 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52488 definition, is described in the section
52499 \begin_layout Subsection
52501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52503 name "sec:File-Formats"
52508 \begin_inset Index idx
52511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52518 \begin_inset Index idx
52521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52530 \begin_layout Standard
52531 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52541 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52544 \begin_layout Standard
52545 You can also define the
52547 Default output format
52549 that is used when you use
52551 View, Update, View Master Document
52555 Update Master Document
52561 menu or the toolbar.
52564 \begin_layout Standard
52565 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52576 \begin_layout Standard
52577 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52579 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52580 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52581 This is done by specifying a
52586 More about this is described in the section
52597 \begin_layout Chapter
52598 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52600 \begin_inset Index idx
52603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52612 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52619 \begin_layout Standard
52621 \begin_inset space ~
52625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52627 reference "tab:Units"
52631 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52632 and used in this documentation.
52635 \begin_layout Standard
52636 \begin_inset Float table
52643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52644 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52662 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52670 \begin_inset Tabular
52671 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52672 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52673 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52674 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52675 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52828 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53099 scaled point (65536
53100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53167 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53291 % of original image width
53296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53380 \begin_layout Standard
53381 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53384 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53391 \begin_layout Bibliography
53392 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53393 LatexCommand bibitem
53400 The \SpecialChar LyX
53402 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53405 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53411 \begin_inset Newline newline
53415 \begin_inset Flex URL
53418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53420 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53428 \begin_layout Bibliography
53429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53430 LatexCommand bibitem
53431 key "latexcompanion"
53436 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53438 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53439 Companion Second Edition.
53442 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53445 \begin_layout Bibliography
53446 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53447 LatexCommand bibitem
53453 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53456 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53460 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53463 \begin_layout Bibliography
53464 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53465 LatexCommand bibitem
53474 : A Document Preparation System.
53477 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53480 \begin_layout Bibliography
53481 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53482 LatexCommand bibitem
53492 The \SpecialChar TeX
53496 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53499 \begin_layout Bibliography
53500 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53501 LatexCommand bibitem
53507 The \SpecialChar TeX
53509 \begin_inset Newline newline
53513 \begin_inset Flex URL
53516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53518 https://ctan.org/topic
53526 \begin_layout Bibliography
53527 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53528 LatexCommand bibitem
53534 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53536 \begin_inset Newline newline
53540 \begin_inset Flex URL
53543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53545 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53553 \begin_layout Bibliography
53554 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53555 LatexCommand bibitem
53562 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53564 name "Documentation"
53565 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53572 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53576 \begin_inset Newline newline
53580 \begin_inset Flex URL
53583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53585 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53593 \begin_layout Bibliography
53594 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53595 LatexCommand bibitem
53602 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53604 name "Documentation"
53605 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53610 how to use the program
53612 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53616 \begin_inset Newline newline
53620 \begin_inset Flex URL
53623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53625 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53633 \begin_layout Bibliography
53634 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53635 LatexCommand bibitem
53642 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53644 name "Documentation"
53645 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53650 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53656 \begin_inset Index idx
53659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53661 packages ! biblatex
53667 \begin_inset Newline newline
53671 \begin_inset Flex URL
53674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53676 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53684 \begin_layout Bibliography
53685 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53686 LatexCommand bibitem
53693 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53695 name "Documentation"
53696 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53701 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53707 \begin_inset Index idx
53710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53718 \begin_inset Newline newline
53722 \begin_inset Flex URL
53725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53727 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53735 \begin_layout Bibliography
53736 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53737 LatexCommand bibitem
53744 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53746 name "Documentation"
53747 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53757 \begin_inset Newline newline
53761 \begin_inset Flex URL
53764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53766 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53774 \begin_layout Bibliography
53775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53776 LatexCommand bibitem
53777 key "makeindex-man"
53783 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53786 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53796 \begin_inset Newline newline
53800 \begin_inset Flex URL
53803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53805 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53813 \begin_layout Bibliography
53814 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53815 LatexCommand bibitem
53822 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53824 name "Documentation"
53825 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53835 \begin_inset Newline newline
53839 \begin_inset Flex URL
53842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53844 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53852 \begin_layout Bibliography
53853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53854 LatexCommand bibitem
53861 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53863 name "Documentation"
53864 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53869 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53871 \begin_inset Newline newline
53875 \begin_inset Flex URL
53878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53880 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53888 \begin_layout Bibliography
53889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53890 LatexCommand bibitem
53897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53899 name "Documentation"
53900 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53905 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53911 \begin_inset Index idx
53914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53922 \begin_inset Newline newline
53926 \begin_inset Flex URL
53929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53931 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53939 \begin_layout Bibliography
53940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53941 LatexCommand bibitem
53948 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53950 name "Documentation"
53951 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53956 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53962 \begin_inset Index idx
53965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53967 packages ! enumitem
53973 \begin_inset Newline newline
53977 \begin_inset Flex URL
53980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53982 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53990 \begin_layout Bibliography
53991 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53992 LatexCommand bibitem
53999 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54001 name "Documentation"
54002 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54007 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54013 \begin_inset Index idx
54016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54018 packages ! fancyhdr
54024 \begin_inset Newline newline
54028 \begin_inset Flex URL
54031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54033 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54041 \begin_layout Bibliography
54042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54043 LatexCommand bibitem
54050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54052 name "Documentation"
54053 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54058 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54064 \begin_inset Index idx
54067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54069 packages ! hyperref
54075 \begin_inset Newline newline
54079 \begin_inset Flex URL
54082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54084 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54092 \begin_layout Bibliography
54093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54094 LatexCommand bibitem
54101 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54103 name "Documentation"
54104 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54109 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54115 \begin_inset Index idx
54118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54120 packages ! microtype
54126 \begin_inset Newline newline
54130 \begin_inset Flex URL
54133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54135 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54143 \begin_layout Bibliography
54144 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54145 LatexCommand bibitem
54152 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54154 name "Documentation"
54155 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54160 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54166 \begin_inset Index idx
54169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54177 \begin_inset Newline newline
54181 \begin_inset Flex URL
54184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54186 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54194 \begin_layout Bibliography
54195 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54196 LatexCommand bibitem
54203 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54205 name "Documentation"
54206 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54211 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54217 \begin_inset Index idx
54220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54222 packages ! prettyref
54228 \begin_inset Newline newline
54232 \begin_inset Flex URL
54235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54237 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54245 \begin_layout Bibliography
54246 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54247 LatexCommand bibitem
54254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54256 name "Documentation"
54257 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54262 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54268 \begin_inset Index idx
54271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54273 packages ! refstyle
54279 \begin_inset Newline newline
54283 \begin_inset Flex URL
54286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54288 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54296 \begin_layout Bibliography
54297 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54298 LatexCommand bibitem
54305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54308 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54313 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54315 \begin_inset Newline newline
54319 \begin_inset Flex URL
54322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54324 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54332 \begin_layout Bibliography
54333 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54334 LatexCommand bibitem
54341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54344 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54349 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54351 \begin_inset Newline newline
54355 \begin_inset Flex URL
54358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54360 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54368 \begin_layout Bibliography
54369 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54370 LatexCommand bibitem
54377 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54380 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54385 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54386 for Cyrillic languages:
54387 \begin_inset Newline newline
54391 \begin_inset Flex URL
54394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54396 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54404 \begin_layout Bibliography
54405 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54406 LatexCommand bibitem
54413 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54416 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54421 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54423 \begin_inset Newline newline
54427 \begin_inset Flex URL
54430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54432 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54440 \begin_layout Bibliography
54441 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54442 LatexCommand bibitem
54449 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54452 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54457 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54459 \begin_inset Newline newline
54463 \begin_inset Flex URL
54466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54468 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54476 \begin_layout Bibliography
54477 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54478 LatexCommand bibitem
54485 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54488 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54493 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54495 \begin_inset Newline newline
54499 \begin_inset Flex URL
54502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54504 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54512 \begin_layout Standard
54513 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54547 \begin_inset Note Note
54550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54557 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54558 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54559 bibliography is the second one:
54567 \begin_layout Standard
54568 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54569 LatexCommand bibtex
54570 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54571 options "biblio/alphadin"
54578 \begin_layout Standard
54579 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54583 \begin_layout Standard
54587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54593 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54602 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54610 \begin_inset Note Note
54613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54614 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54615 \begin_inset space ~
54619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54621 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54633 \begin_layout Standard
54634 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54635 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54641 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54642 LatexCommand printindex